Garmin | Cirrus Perspective SR22T | Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR22T Cirrus Perspective Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T

Garmin Cirrus Perspective  SR22T Cirrus Perspective  Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
CIRRUS PERSPECTIVE+ by Garmin
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Pilot’s Guide
CIRRUS SR2x
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
2345 Turner Road SE
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
CIRRUS PERSPECTIVE+
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
190-02183-02
Revision A
CIRRUS SR2x
System Software Version 2647.N2 or later
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2016-2017, 2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 2647.N2 or later for the Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin Integrated Avionics
System. Where used, references to ‘SR2x’ are inclusive of the SR20, SR22, and SR22T. Some differences in operation may be observed
when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions. Always refer to the approved current pertinent flight
manual for a description of systems, limitations, and procedures.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® NXi, FliteCharts®, Connext®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Garmin ESP™, Garmin SVT™, SurfaceWatch™ and WireAware™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective™ is a trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation.
Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius, XM, and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
i
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
ii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only an
aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic within
range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from
aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may
be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: Do not rely on the displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance
altitudes.
WARNING: Do not operate this equipment without first obtaining qualified instruction.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a system
message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that may be
incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned in error
as displayed.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering. The
traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any circumstances
or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following geographic areas
(due to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South of 70°
South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern
Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70°
North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South latitude between
longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within the
MPEL boundary.
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of
precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color not
representative of the true intensity.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
iv
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight guidance during airborne
or ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS information regarding the current active
runway, condition, or information about the position of hold lines.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will harm
the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases. Depictions
of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s
Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to our web site at
www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields can
cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut down, or
while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no comparison
is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with established
FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures that may
be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and
regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at www.
flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their impact
on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by selecting
‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
vi
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the guidance in AC
120-76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FlightCharts and ChartView. The accuracy of the charts
is subject to the chart data provider. Own-ship position on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to
meet the accuracy specified in AC 120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source
of aeronautical charts, such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the
aircraft and available to the pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable Electronic Device
(PED), its use must be consistent with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior to flying
these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the corresponding
current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special Procedure in the
navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude.
This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data
representing the affected areas.
NOTE: The nose of the ‘own ship’ symbol represents the location of the aircraft. The center of any traffic symbol
represents the location of that traffic. The traffic and own ship symbols are an abstract representation and
do not reflect the physical extent of the aircraft/traffic, and should not replace other methods for identifying
traffic.
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
NOTE: System navigation utilities may not reliably calculate range and bearing information when the aircraft is
operating north of 89° North latitude or south of 89° South latitude. This may result in the system displaying
small gaps in racetrack holding pattern depictions (GRS 7800 installations only).
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge
points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has
been cleared.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
vii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Operate Perspective+ system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
viii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property
rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of
Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright
treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its
third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers.
You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the
Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to
any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
ix
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Blank Page
x
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02183-00
190-02183-01
Revision
A
A
Date
12/21/16
12/12/17
190-02183-02
A
1/3/19
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Page Range
Description
All
Initial Release for GDU 20.04
All
Initial Release for GDU 20.70
Revision
Added Bluetooth
Added WireAware
Added other GDU 20.70 parameters
All
Initial Release for GDU 21.16
Revision
Updated Takeoff Mode
Flexibility added to Along Track Waypoint placement
AddedVNAV Guidance for Non-precision NAVAID-BasedApproaches
Added Enhanced Descent Only VNAV
Added Glide Range Ring
Further Defined Quick Select Box & Insertion Point Indicator
Redefined Procedures for Flight Planning and Instrument Procedures
Added GMA 350H/350Hc
Added CAS messages
Added System messages
Updated Database Management
Updated Warnings/Cautions/Advisories
Made clerical changes
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
xi
REVISION INFORMATION
Blank Page
xii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4
Display Controller.......................................................... 6
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 9
System Operation.................................................... 10
System Power-up......................................................... 10
Normal Operation........................................................ 11
Reversionary Mode...................................................... 11
System Annunciations.................................................. 12
System Status.............................................................. 14
ADAHRS Operation...................................................... 15
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 16
Accessing System Functionality............................. 21
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Menus........................................................................ 26
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 27
Split Screen Functionality............................................. 31
System Settings........................................................... 33
System Utilities............................................................ 42
Display Backlighting................................................ 47
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 52
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 52
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 54
Altimeter.................................................................... 55
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 58
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 59
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 60
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 67
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 74
Temperature Display.................................................... 74
Wind Data.................................................................. 76
Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator.................................... 77
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 78
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 79
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 79
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 79
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 80
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 80
2.4 Garmin SVT (Optional)............................................. 82
Garmin SVT (Synthetic Vision Technology)...................... 82
SVT Operation............................................................. 83
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 95
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 95
Comparator Annunciations........................................... 96
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................... 96
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................... 97
SVT In Reversionary Mode............................................ 97
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 97
SVT Unusual Attitudes.................................................. 98
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS Display.............................................................. 100
Engine Page............................................................ 103
Fuel Calculations....................................................... 106
TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System........ 107
Leaning Assist Mode.............................................. 110
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode....................... 111
System Display.......................................................... 112
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview................................................................. 115
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.................... 116
GMA 350/350c/350H/350Hc Audio Panel Controls........ 118
PFD/MFD Controller................................................... 121
4.2 COM Operation...................................................... 124
COM Tuning Boxes..................................................... 124
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 125
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 125
Auto-tuning from the MFD......................................... 126
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 129
4.3 NAV Operation....................................................... 130
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 130
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 131
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 131
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 132
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 134
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 135
DME Tuning.............................................................. 136
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4 Mode S Transponder.............................................. 137
Transponder Controls................................................. 137
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 138
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 140
IDENT Function......................................................... 141
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 142
Power-Up.................................................................. 142
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 142
Speaker.................................................................... 142
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 142
Intercom System (ICS) with the GMA 350/350c............ 143
Split COM Mode with the GMA 350/350c/350H/350Hc.146
3D Audio.................................................................. 147
Bluetooth® (GMA 350c/350Hc Only)............................ 148
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 150
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 151
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 151
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 151
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 151
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
xiv
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 153
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar............................ 155
Using Map Displays............................................... 157
Map Orientation........................................................ 157
Map Range............................................................... 159
Map Panning............................................................. 161
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 163
Topography............................................................... 164
Map Symbols............................................................ 167
Airways.................................................................... 171
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 173
Destination Airport Information.................................. 176
Waypoints............................................................... 178
Airports.................................................................... 179
Non-Airport and User Created Waypoints..................... 186
Airspaces................................................................. 195
Nearest Airspace....................................................... 196
Smart Airspace.......................................................... 198
Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 199
Flight Planning....................................................... 204
Selection and Modification Methods........................... 205
Flight Plan Display..................................................... 207
Creating a Flight Plan................................................ 210
Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications............ 212
Flight Plan Operations................................................ 221
Managing Flight Plans............................................... 234
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 243
Constraints............................................................... 244
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................................... 247
Vertical Navigation Direct To....................................... 251
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 252
Departures................................................................ 254
Arrivals .................................................................... 258
Approaches .............................................................. 261
5.9 Weight and Balance Planning............................... 275
Weight and Balance Caution And Warning Conditions... 278
5.10 Trip Planning........................................................... 279
Trip Planning............................................................. 279
5.11 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 283
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 Data Link Weather................................................. 286
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 287
Weather Product Age................................................. 290
Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 294
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 304
Weather Product Overview......................................... 308
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 344
Abnormal Operations for Garmin Connext Weather...... 346
6.2 Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 348
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 349
Additional Stormscope Displays.................................. 350
Stormscope Abnormal Operations............................... 351
6.3 Terrain Displays...................................................... 352
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 353
Terrain Page.............................................................. 356
Wire Obstacle Information and Alerting....................... 357
Additional Terrain Display........................................... 358
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain........................ 358
Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Alerting Displays.................... 361
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 365
Additional TAWS-B Alerting........................................ 365
Inhibiting Alerting...................................................... 368
System Status............................................................ 368
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4 TAS Traffic................................................................ 371
Theory of Operation................................................... 371
Traffic Alerts.............................................................. 374
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 375
System Test............................................................... 376
Operation................................................................. 377
6.5 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 383
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 383
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 385
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 385
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 387
Traffic Description...................................................... 389
Operation................................................................. 389
ADS-B System Status................................................. 395
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 399
Basic Autopilot Operation........................................... 399
AFCS Controls .......................................................... 400
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 402
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 402
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 402
Flight Director Modes................................................. 403
Command Bars.......................................................... 404
7.3 AFCS Modes............................................................ 405
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 405
Lateral Modes........................................................... 410
Combination Modes (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA).............. 415
7.4 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation................ 427
Flight Control............................................................ 427
Engagement.............................................................. 428
Disengagement......................................................... 428
Level Mode............................................................... 429
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 430
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 430
Underspeed Protection............................................... 430
Overspeed Protection................................................. 432
Level Mode............................................................... 433
7.6 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 434
Suspected Autopilot Malfunction................................ 434
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 434
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
190-02183-02 Rev. A
8.1 SafeTaxi................................................................... 437
8.2 Charts...................................................................... 439
ChartView................................................................. 440
FliteCharts................................................................ 449
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 455
8.3 Satellite Phone and SMS Messaging................... 458
Registering with Garmin Connext ............................... 458
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver.............................. 458
Telephone Communication......................................... 459
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 466
8.4 SurfaceWatch.......................................................... 477
Information Box........................................................ 477
Alerts....................................................................... 479
SurfaceWatch Setup................................................... 481
8.5 Database Cycle Numbers and Revisions............. 483
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 483
8.6 WiFi Connections................................................... 485
8.7 Connext Setup........................................................ 488
8.8 Position Reporting................................................. 491
8.9 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 493
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 493
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 494
8.10 Flight Data Logging............................................... 498
8.11 Electronic Checklists.............................................. 500
8.12 Auxiliary Video (Optional)..................................... 502
Video Setup.............................................................. 502
Display Selection....................................................... 503
Input Selection.......................................................... 504
Zoom/Range............................................................. 504
8.13 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............. 505
Roll Engagement....................................................... 505
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 507
Low Airspeed Protection............................................. 508
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 508
8.14 Hypoxia Recognition & Automatic Descent Mode.509
Determining Pilot Alertness........................................ 509
Automatic Descent Mode........................................... 510
8.15 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 512
GDL 59/69/69A SXM Troubleshooting.......................... 512
APPENDICES
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 515
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 516
CAS Messages........................................................... 517
WARNING Messages................................................. 518
Caution messages..................................................... 519
Message Advisory Alerts............................................. 521
Voice Alerts............................................................... 521
System Annunciations................................................ 522
System Message Advisories........................................ 523
Database Management................................................... 537
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 537
Database Deletion Feature ........................................ 548
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 549
Aviation Terms and Acronyms..................................... 551
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 561
Map Symbols.................................................................... 565
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
xvi
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Cirrus Perspective+ Integrated Avionics by Garmin presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The Garmin Automatic
Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), yaw damper (YD - optional), and
manual electric trim (MET) functions. Refer to the AFCS section for more information.
EIS
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1250A (2) or GDU 1050A (2) (Optional) – The system features two 12 (optional 10 inch), high resolution
LED backlit display units. The left display is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD). The right display is
configured as an Multi Function Display (MFD). The displays communicate with each other through a Highspeed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to the
Garmin Integrated Avionics unit (GIA).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 64W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each GIA contains a GPS Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver, VHF COM/NAV/
GS receivers, a flight director and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA is paired with the on-side
display via an HSDB connection. The GIAs are not paired and do not communicate with each other directly.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GEA 71B (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
AFCS
• GSU 75 (1) or GSU 75 (2) (Optional) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe to
provide pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system. This unit also provides
aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to the PFD, MFD, and GIA. The GSU 75 contains
advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the GMU to obtain magnetic
field information, and with the GIA to obtain GPS information. ADAHRS modes of operation are discussed
later in this document.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 (1) or GMU 44 (2) (Optional) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data
to the GSU for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the
GSU and communicates with the it, using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GTP 59 (1) or GTP 59 (2) (Optional) – The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data
to the GSU.
APPENDICES
• GMA 350c (1) or GMA 350 (1) (Alernate) or GMA 350H (1) (Alternate) or GMA 350Hc (1) (Alternate) – The
Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM audio, intercom, telephone, and marker beacon controls (refer to the Audio
Panel & CNS Section). This unit communicates with both GIAs, using an RS-232 digital interface.
• GCU 479 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS), navigation radio (NAV), communication radio
(COM), transponder (XPDR), and course (CRS) controls for the system through an RS-232 digital interface.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• GMC 707 (1) – Provides the controls for the Garmin AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with the PFD and MFD.
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GTX 335R (1) or GTX 345R (1) (Alternate) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C, S and ADS-B
capability. The optional GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the
PFD. The transponder communicates with the both GIAs through an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 81 (2) or GSA 81 (2) and GSA 80 (1) (Optional) – The GSA 81 servo is used for the automatic control of
yaw, while the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with
each GIA.
• GTA 82 (1) – The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA and GSA to control the DC motor
to drive the aircraft trim system.
EIS
• GSM 86 (2) or GSM 86 (3) (Optional) – The GSM 86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output
torque of the GSA 80/81 servo actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTS 800 (1) (Optional) – The GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the
inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection. The GTS 800
also has an analog audio connection to the Audio Panel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) or GDL 69 SXM (1) (Optional) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver
provides weather information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio
entertainment. The unit communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio and/or SiriusXM Weather service is required to enable the GDL 69A SXM capabilities.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 59 (1) (Optional) – The GDL 59 is a WiFi data link transceiver. Operation is performed on the MFD. The
GDL 59 is connected to the GDL 69A SXM (if installed) or to the MFD using HSDB. The GDL 59 also includes
analog connections to the audio panel.
• GSR 56 (1) (Optional) – The Iridium Transceiver provides telephone voice communication by means of pilot
and copilot headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network. The GSR 56 is
connected to the optional GDL 59 with an RS-232 digital interface and analog audio connections. Otherwise,
the GSR 56 is connected the #1 GIA 64W with an RS-232 digital interface, with analog connections to the audio
panel.
AFCS
• Flight Stream 510 (1) (Optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth connectivity between a compatible tablet/
mobile device and the avionics system. It is inserted into an MFD Secure Digital (SD) card slot.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are also shown in Figure 1-1.
The system is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• Enhanced Vision System
• CO Guardian Carbon Monoxide Detector
• KN 63 DME
• L3 Stormscope WX 500 Lightning Detection
APPENDICES
• KR 87 ADF
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
INDEX
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
2
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GMC 707
(AFCS Controller)
GTS 800
(TAS)
GCU 479
(Display
Controller)
Enhanced
Vision System
#2 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
#1 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
#2 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
Servo Logic
GPS/SBAS
GTX 345R
or
VOR/LOC
GTX 335R
(Transponder)
G/S
Flight
Director
GEA 71B (Engine &
Airframe I/F)
AFCS Mode
Logic
#1 GSA 81 (Pitch)
AFCS
AFCS Mode
Logic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VHF COM
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
#2 GIA 64W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
#1 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
FS 510
(SD Card
Bluetooth
Transceiver)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350c
(Audio Panel)
or
GMA 350
or
GMA 350H
or
GMA 350Hc
#2
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(MFD)
EIS
#1 GIA 64W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
GSR 56
(Iridium
Transceiver)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
#1
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(PFD)
Servo Logic
#2 GSA 81 (Roll)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
#3 GSA 80 (Yaw)
#4 GTA 82 (PTrim)
KN-63
(DME)
APPENDICES
KR-87
(ADF)
CO Guardian
Stormscope
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
Figure 1-1 Perspective+ System
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel and AFCS controls are described in the Audio & CNS and AFCS sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, Display Controller, AFCS Control Unit and audio
panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
EIS
PFD
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
13
MFD
16
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
15
14
12
6
11
7
10
8
APPENDICES
9
13
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
4
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
4
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
5
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down. See the Flight Management Section for information on the Quick Select Box.
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor ON
and OFF. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual characters
for the highlighted cursor location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AFCS
Data Entry: With the cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves cursor
location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location). When the cursor is turned ON
while viewing the Active Flight Plan Page, the cursor is placed on the line below the Insertion Point
Indicator. The pointer indicates data entered at the cursor will be inserted above the line selected. See
the Flight Management Section for information on the Insertion Point Indicator.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears, indicating more
items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
10
APPENDICES
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page group; small knob
selects a specific page from the group)
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
13
Bezel Keys – Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the Display Controller (GCU 479). The following
list provides an overview of the controls located on the Display Controller:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
23
13
14
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
22
16
21
17
18
AFCS
20
19
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-3 Display Controller (GCU 479)
6
1
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
2
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
3
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
4
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob for the MFD. Press the FMS Knob to turn the
selection cursor ON and OFF. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
EIS
Data Entry: With the cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves cursor
location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location). When the cursor is turned ON
while viewing the Active Flight Plan Page, the cursor is placed on the line below the Insertion Point
Indicator. The pointer indicates data entered at the cursor will be inserted above the line selected. See
the Flight Management Section for information on the Insertion Point Indicator.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears, indicating more
items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
9
NAV Key – Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating NAV tuning mode is active.
10
CRS Key – Selects/deselects CRS mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating CRS mode is active.
11
XPDR Key – Selects/deselects XPDR mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating XPDR mode is active.
12
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob – Acts as follows:
AFCS
COM Key – Selects/deselects COM tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a
blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating COM tuning mode is active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page group; small knob
selects a specific page from the group)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
NAV Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
APPENDICES
CRS Mode: Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is selected.
Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected course provides course
reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
XPDR Mode: Selects the transponder code.
13
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5
MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
14
IDENT Key – Activates transponder IDENT function. Annunciator light above the key is lit while Ident is
active.
15
VOL Knob – Controls COM/NAV audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM/NAV frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM mode, or NAV ID On/Off
in NAV mode.
16
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
17
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
19
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
20
Alphabetic Keys – Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob. When the Quick Select Box is shown on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD,
alphanumeric keys can be used to enter data into the Quick Select Box area.
21
Numeric Keys – Blue Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in COM, NAV, and XPDR fields.
White Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in FMS fields, without having to select individual
numbers with the FMS Knob.
White mode is enabled for the following conditions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• FMS cursor is active on any MFD page
• Map pointer is active on any MFD map
• Flight Plan page, Weight and Balance page, Fuel Initialization page, or Checklist page are displayed
Blue mode is enabled for the following conditions:
22
Home Key – Displays the Navigation Map Page.
23
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down. See the Flight Management Section for information on the Quick Select Box.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• COM, NAV, or XPDR tuning mode is selected, and no white mode conditions are active
8
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The GDU data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the display
bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database and
system software updates. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported from an SD card in the MFD.
EIS
PFD
MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SD Card Slots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-4 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
Inserting and Removing an SD card:
AFCS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status,
ADAHRS modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
NOTE: See the current version of the pertinent flight manual for specific procedures concerning avionics
power application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, and external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. All system annunciations should disappear typically within
one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Screen displays the following information:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• IFR/VFR charts database information (optional)
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Crew Profile
• Copyright
• Checklist File
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
10
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-5 Normal Operation
AFCS
REVERSIONARY MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
APPENDICES
In the event of an MFD failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
If a display fails, the appropriate GIA Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer communicate
with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed
display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup paths for the
AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is completely
automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Reversionary Mode may also be manually activated by pressing the red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing
this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the failed
PFD) Flagged Invalid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
AFCS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the current version
of the pertinent flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
APPENDICES
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for additional information regarding pilot
INDEX
responses to these annunciations.
12
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Comment
System Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
ADAHRS (GRS unit).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
ADAHRS or magnetometer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the
ADAHRS or magnetometer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
air data computer.
A red or amber ‘X’ through
any other display field (such as
Other Various Red/Amber
engine instrumentation fields)
X Indications
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
AFCS
Display system is not receiving
valid groundspeed information.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
ADAHRS calibration incomplete
or configuration module
failure.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
ADAHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
ADAHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are
not present (see the current
version of the pertinent
flight manual).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the air
data computer.
ADAHRS is aligning.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
Viewing LRU information:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin dealer
informed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-7 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Info or Airframe
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AFCS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the Database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the Database window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The STBY DB Softkey, when available on the System Status Page, makes the standby navigation database
become the active navigation database on the next power cycle. Refer to the Database Management section in
the Appendices for more information.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The ANN TEST Softkey, when enabled, causes the system to issue a continuous double chime audio alert.
In addition, the annunciator lights on the GMC 707 and GCU 479 controllers illuminate. To silence the audio
alert and extinguish the annunciator lights, press the ANN TEST Softkey again.
14
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADAHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GSU 75 ADAHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the ADAHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the ADAHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Eight ADAHRS modes of operation are available (see Table 1-2)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by system messages.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering in reversionary mode can degrade ADAHRS accuracy.
Air Data
Available
ADAHRS Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS no-Air Data
Yes
Yes
No
ADAHRS no-GPS
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS no-Mag Data
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS no-Mag/no-Air Data
Yes
No
No
ADAHRS coast-on-gyros until
invalid
No
Yes
No
ADAHRS no-Mag/coast-on-gyros
until invalid
No
Valid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will coast-on-gyros
until it becomes invalid.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading Invalid.
AFCS
No
Attitude
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADAHRS no-GPS/no-Mag
Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mag Data
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Data
Available
EIS
ADAHRS Mode
No
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
No
Table 1-2 ADAHRS Operation
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDICES
The ADAHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and
its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every five years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt the pilot on startup
when an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD.
In some circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution
is automatically coupled to the PFD. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” are then displayed in the
Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers
are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
EIS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Each GIA Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux’ Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
AFCS
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
16
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
GPS Receiver
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-8 GPS Status Page
AFCS
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GPS Status Page displays satellites currently in view at their respective positions on a sky view diagram.
The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner
circle representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
APPENDICES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SATELLITE STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated
using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures
of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in
which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual
error measurement.
EIS
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the
process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected
continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
‘Acquiring’ is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing
a solution.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates ‘Inactive’. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ‘Active’.
AFCS
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM PREDICTION
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
APPENDICES
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
INDEX
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages, “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
18
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reference
the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at flygarmin.com as required.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
AFCS
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
EIS
SBAS SELECTION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS
Field in the GPS Status box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be
updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
AFCS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below
each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
20
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey is black
on white. The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Layout
Description
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset, HSI, or Traffic).
Displays the Inset Map.
Displays the HSI Map.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Replaces the HSI Map with a dedicated traffic display.
APPENDICES
Map Off
Inset Map
HSI Map
Inset Trfc
HSI Trfc
Level 4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
AFCS
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display another set of softkeys and
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
Traffic
Topo
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TER
WX LGND
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LTNG Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Datalink
STRMSCP
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
FPA Ref
Wire
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription
optional).
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext lightning information
(based on data link weather source selection) on the PFD Map.
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Selects the data link weather source for the PFD Map.
Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the function is on.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys.
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
Displays the FPA reference line on the SVT pitch ladder at the selected
angle.
Displays power lines on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Selects the display mode of the AOA Indicator (optional)
Off: Disables the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD.
Auto: Enables automatic display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD when
the angle of attack is ≥ 0.2, or when flaps are extended.
On: Enables the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Description
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 3: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map.
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
Displays weather and coverage on PFD Map.
METAR
Lightning
AOA
Level 4
22
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Wind
DME
Bearing 1
ADC
AHRS
AHRS1
AHRS2
ALT Units
STD Baro
OBS
XPDR
VFR
Code
BKSP
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
0-7
Ident
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
APPENDICES
On
ALT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
Standby
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AFCS
CDI
DME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Meters
IN
HPA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing 2
Displays ADC selection softkeys.
Selects the #1 ADC.
Selects the #2 ADC (optional).
Displays the AHRS selection softkeys.
Selects the #1 AHRS.
Selects the #2 AHRS (optional).
Cycles the ‘Bearing 2 Information’ Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint ID and GPS-derived distance, and Off (optional).
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected).
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
Cycles through GPS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays the ‘DME Tuning’ Window, allowing tuning and selection of the
DME (optional).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADC1
ADC2
EIS
Sensors
Description
Displays the wind option softkeys.
Wind information not displayed.
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Wind direction arrows with headwind and crosswind components.
Displays ‘DME Information’ Window.
Cycles the ‘Bearing 1 Information’ Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint ID and GPS-derived distance, and Off.
Displays the sensor selection softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off
Option 1
Option 2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Ident
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TMR/REF
Nearest
Level 4
Description
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays ‘References’ Window to access the Timer, Vspeeds, Minimums, and Position.
Displays ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
Table 1-3 PFD Softkeys
MFD SOFTKEYS
EIS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Level 1
Engine
Level 3
Description
Displays ‘EIS - Engine’ Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more information).
Anti-Ice
Displays Anti-Ice Softkeys.
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve.
Left
Selects Auto Tank Mode.
Auto
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve.
Right
DCLTR
Declutters the ‘Engine Temperatures’ Box removing bars and temperatures readouts.
Assist
Identifies temperature peaks.
Fuel-W&B
Displays ‘Initial Usable Fuel’ Page and softkeys.
Full
Resets initial usable fuel to full.
Tabs
Resets initial usable fuel to tabs.
Undo
Rejects the last entry and resets to the previous entry.
W&B
Saves the usable fuel amount shown on the ‘Initial Usable Fuel’ Page and displays the
‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page.
Displays second level Map Options softkeys.
Displays traffic information on ‘Navigation - Map’ Page.
Traffic
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Inset
Removes the inset window from ‘Navigation Map’ Page.
Off
FPL PROG Displays ‘Flight Plan Progress’ Window.
Displays VSD inset on ‘Navigation Map’ Page. The softkey annunciator is green when
VSD
the VSD is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Map Opt
Level 2
24
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
VSD
APPENDICES
CHRT Opt
SYNC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Charts
Displays Connext Weather lightning information on the ‘Navigation Map’ Page
(optional).
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys.
Displays the most pertinent chart based on the phase of flight and loaded procedures
in the active flight plan.
AFCS
Detail
Displays Garmin Connext radar precipitation and radar coverage information
(optional).
Displays XM lightning information on ‘Navigation Map’ Page (optional).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR
Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
PRECIP
EIS
AWY
Description
Selects VSD profile information to display:
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for active flight plan
information or along current track with no active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation
scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on ‘Navigation Map’ Page (optional).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on ‘Navigation Map’ Page (optional).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TER
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Info
DP
STAR
APR
NOTAM
EIS
Checklist
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
Level 3
Description
Displays airport information:
Info 1: Displays ‘Airport Information’ Page
Info 2: Displays ‘Airport Directory’ Page
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional checklists.
Selects the highlighted checklist item.
Returns to the top-level softkeys.
Immediately accesses the emergency procedures.
Table 1-4 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
MENUS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
26
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Options for FPL Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Options for Nearest
Intersections Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-10 Page Menu Examples
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
APPENDICES
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The Display Title is comprised
of the Page Group and Active Page Title. In the bottom right corner of the screen, a page group window is
displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are displayed along the bottom of the window.
The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The current Page Group and current page
within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM,
Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Active Page Title
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-11 Page Title and Page Groups
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
AFCS
There are several pages which may be selected by pressing the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page title will change when a different page softkey is pressed, but
the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info softkeys show different page titles (‘Aux - XM Radio’ and
‘Aux - XM Information’ respective) within the same page, ‘XM Radio’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
• IFR/VFR Charts (optional)
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope (optional)
APPENDICES
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
INDEX
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT (optional)/ TAWS-B (optional)
28
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
EIS
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VOR Information
• VRP Information
• User Waypoint Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Weight and Balance
• Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Utility
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
• SiriusXM Pages (optional)
EIS
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
• Satellite Phone Pages (optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Telephone (TEL Softkey)
- Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)
• Maintenance WiFi Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Connext Page (optional)
• System Status
• Video (optional)
• ADS-B Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Connext Setup
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Databases
30
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
• SurfaceWatch Setup (optional)
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
EIS
• Nearest NDB
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest User WPTS
• Nearest Frequencies
EIS (Engine Instruments Page Group)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Nearest Airspaces
• Engine
- Initial Usable Fuel (Fuel-W&B Softkey)
Table 1-5 Page Groups and Pages
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
• Approach Loading
• Arrival Loading
AFCS
• Departure Loading
SPLIT SCREEN FUNCTIONALITY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart pages may be viewed in split screen mode with the Navigation Map Page and the Active Flight Plan
Page. When the system is powered-up on the ground, following acknowledgement of the MFD Power-up
Display, the Navigation Map Page and Active Flight Plan Page will be displayed in normal page view. To activate
the split screen functionality, press the Charts Softkey. Two display panes are displayed on the MFD. If split
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
screen is activated from the Navigation Map Page, the page title will show ‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’. If
split screen is activated from the Active Flight Plan Page, the page title will change to show ‘FPL - Chart + Active
Flight Plan’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Additional Features section for more information on Charts, and how to enable Charts Full Screen.
MFD in Split Screen Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Page Title shows
Map - Chart + Navigation Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Dark purple Pane Selector
shows Charts
is the active display pane
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Figure 1-12 Split Screen Mode
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In split screen mode, the active display pane is outlined by a dark purple box called the pane selector.
Softkeys and menu options will automatically change depending on which display pane is active. Display
panes may be displayed vertically in Narrow View, or horizontally in Wide View. In Narrow View, move the
Joystick left or right to move the pane selector. In Wide View, move the Joystick up and down to move the
pane selector. To change between Wide View and Narrow View, push and hold the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MFD in Split Screen Mode
Pane Selector Box
APPENDICES
Dark purple Pane
Selector shows Charts is
the active display pane
- Move Joystick in direction of
dark purple arrows to move
display pane
- Push and hold
Joystick to change
Narrow/Wide view
Softkeys for the
active display pane
INDEX
Figure 1-13 Split Screen in Wide View
32
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
For information on viewing Charts and the Active Flight Plan Page with the Flight Plan map, see the Flight
Management Section.
For more information on Charts and how to enable Charts Full Screen, see the Additional Features section.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling split screen mode:
1) From the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page press the Charts Softkey, or press
the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode On’.
2) To disable the split screen mode, press the Charts Softkey again or press the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode
Off’. The display returns to the base page, either the Navigation Map Page or the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System settings and crew profiles are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan text may
be edited. Managing crew profiles and editing the system system settings are discussed in this section.
Configure System
Time
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Configure settings
Change Display
Unit Settings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- GPS CDI
- Channel Spacing
- Flight Director Format
- Nearest Airport
Configure Alert Settings
BARO Alerts Airspace Alerts Arrival Alerts -
Restore System Defaults
AFCS
Crew Profile
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
APPENDICES
Select System Setup Page
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 1-14 System Setup 1/2 Pages
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ or ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
CREW PROFILES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected crew
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently active
profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of the System
Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or
deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from an SD card
into the system.
CREW PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘No crew profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Crew profile import failed.’
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Crew profile export failed.’
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile
filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ Window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
INDEX
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
34
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Active’ profile Field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
INDEX
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
EIS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the Window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page. The
imported profile becomes the active profile.
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
AFCS
Figure 1-15 Crew Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key
with ‘Export’ highlighted.
36
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the
SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to
return to the ‘Pilot Profile Exporting’ Window without exporting the profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded’. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
Figure 1-16 Crew Profile Export (Aux - System Setup Page)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DATE/TIME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system obtains the current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-17 System Time (UTC Format)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
37
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
Figure 1-18 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Configuring the system time:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ Field is highlighted.
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS POSITION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The References Window on the PFD shows the current GPS position at the bottom of the window using the
selected display format (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-19 GPS Position (References Window)
38
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing the GPS Position in the References Window:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Position’ Field appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To remove the ‘References’ Window, press the TMR/REF Softkey or press the CLR Key.
Changing the GPS Position display format:
1) On the MFD, turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Position’ Field in the ‘Display Units’ Window.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”) and press the
ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
Distance and
Speed
Metric
Nautical*
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet*
Meters
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
Temperature
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons
Liters
Pounds
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Category
Settings
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North)*
True (North)
AFCS
Fuel and
Fuel Flow**
Weight**
Position**
Exceptions
N/A
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Ground Speed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS-B Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
N/A
Engine Indication System (EIS)
FOD in DEST Data Block
N/A
All positions
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Default setting
**Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
Table 1-6 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
Changing a display unit setting:
APPENDICES
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
40
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments Section for information on Baro Transition Alert settings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPACE ALERTS
See the Flight Management Section for information on Airspace Alert settings.
SURFACEWATCH
See the Additional Features Section for more information on setting the SurfaceWatch Alerts.
EIS
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
See the Flight Instruments Section for more information on the flight director format settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management Section for information on setting the data bar fields on the MFD.
GPS CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
See the Flight Instruments Section for information on setting the CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
See the Audio & CNS Section for more information on COM channel spacing settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management Section for more information on the nearest airport settings.
STABILITY AND PROTECTION
AFCS
See the Additional Features Section for information on enabling and disabling the Stability and Protection
feature.
PAGE NAVIGATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages listed within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the ‘Page
Group’ Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the ‘Page Navigation’ Box on the ‘Aux - System
Setup 2’ Page.
APPENDICES
Off – Displays the Page Group Window with one click of either FMS Knob.
On – Displays the Page Group Window and navigates to the next page group with one click of either FMS Knob.
The pilot can select, from the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page, the amount of time the Page Group Window is
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selecting page navigation settings:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ Field in the ‘Page Navigation’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ Field in the ‘Page Navigation’ Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
EIS
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Audio Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice field in the ‘Audio’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHARTS
See the Additional Feature Section for information on setting up auto taxi chart.
SYSTEM UTILITIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the ‘Aux - Utility’
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset.
42
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-20 Utility Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIMERS
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
AFCS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the ‘System Setup’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS ‘Generic’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight’ timer Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Departure Time’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
44
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch fuel
tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the ‘Messages’ Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to a flashing Message label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the ‘Alerts’ Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the Alerts label. Pressing the Alerts Softkey again removes the
‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-21 PFD Alerts Window
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the ‘Messages’ Window and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’ Field.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
46
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the ‘PFD Setup’ Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only
be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-22 PFD Setup Menu
Adjusting display backlighting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup’ Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup’ Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
47
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
48
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional indications such as bugs and
annunciations on selected flight instruments during certain AFCS flight director modes. Refer to the AFCS
section for more information about these indications.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing easy-to-scan Primary Flight Displays (PFDs)
featuring a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the
flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the
PFDs and are explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Altimeter, showing
• System time
– Barometric setting
• Inset Map
– Ground Speed
– Selected Altitude
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
– True Airspeed
– Reference bugs
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• Vertical Navigation indications
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– DME Information Window
• DME Tuning Window
– Navigation source
• Wind data
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated Airspeed
– Turn Rate Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
18
17
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16
15
EIS
2
14
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
13
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
11
6
10
7
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
Percent Power Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Ground Speed
15
Altimeter
5
Current Heading
16
Selected Altitude
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
17
COM Frequency Box
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
Navigation Status Box
8
Softkeys
19
AFCS Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Status Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
50
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
11
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
10
9
EIS
8
2
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
6
4
5
Required Vertical Speed
3
Wind Information
9
Vertical Deviation Indicator
4
10
VNV Target Altitude
5
Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
(optional)
DME Information Window
11
Marker Beacon Annunciation
6
Barametric Minimums/Decision Height
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
2
Course Deviation Indicator and
To/From Indicator
Selected Heading
1
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 56 knots of airspeed viewable
at any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until
reaching the never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red. The true airspeed is displayed in knots
below the Airspeed Indicator. The Ground Speed appears in knots to the left of the true airspeed.
Operating Ranges
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vspeed
References
Indicated
Airspeed
Speed
Ranges
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
AFCS
Ground
Speed
True
Airspeed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
APPENDICES
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
INDEX
limitations. This option is only available in SR22 models.
52
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the indicated airspeed number changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if
any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
EIS
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) bugs can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is categorized
as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. All Vspeed bug changes are restored to their default values when power is cycled.
NOTE: VX and VY can only be modified on the SR22.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ON/OFF’ Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menus
Vspeed bugs can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turning all Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) To activate all Vspeed bugs, press the ENT Key with ‘All References On’ highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system is activated, the pitch scale
is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVT.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. When the optional Electronic Stability
and Protection (ESP) system is available, double ticks marks also appear on the roll scale; refer to the Additional
Features section for more information about ESP indications. Angle of bank is shown by the position of the
pointer on the roll scale.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar of displacement is equal to one
half ball of displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
54
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
When a Selected Altitude is set, a cyan Selected Altitude Intercept Arc (if enabled) is displayed on the
navigation maps when the aircraft is climbing or descending. This arc appears at the estimated position the
aircraft will intercept the Selected Altitude; refer to the Flight Management Section for additional information
about the Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
When meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments. If set, the Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
2) If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
APPENDICES
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot can choose to display overlays for the indicated altitude and Selected Altitude using alternate display
units. For example, if the Altimeter is displaying feet, the system can show a metric overlay for the indicated
and selected altitudes without changing the scale or display units of the Altimeter. Note that the altitude tape
does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD OPT Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
EIS
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
NOTE: Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNAV vertical deviation, moving
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the
descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target Altitude, the aircraft may
not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
AFCS
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
INDEX
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
56
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD OPT Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or:
Press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs when
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The flight level Baro Transition
Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this flight level.
The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure setting. The pilot
can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ Field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the ‘BARO Transition Alert’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude’ Field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to
the previous altitude selection.
AFCS
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ Field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight Level’ Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10) Use the FMS Knobs to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR
Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
57
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape. The current
vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape. The pilot can choose the display units format for the
VSI and altimeter as feet or meters.
AFCS
If the VSI is displayed in feet, numeric labels with major tick marks appear at 1000 and 2000 feet per minute
(fpm). Minor tick marks appear for every 500 fpm. If the current vertical speed is at least 100 fpm, digits appear
in the pointer. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of
the tape while displaying the current vertical speed numerically.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the VSI is displayed in meters, numeric labels with major tick marks appear at 5 and 10 meters per second.
Minor tick marks appear for every 2.5 meters per second. If the current vertical speed it least 0.5 meters per
second, digits appear in the pointer. If the rate of ascent or descent exceeds 10 meters per second, the pointer
appears at the corresponding edge of the tape while displaying the current vertical speed numerically.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a VNV
Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to the Supplemental Flight Data discussion later in
this section for more information about VNV indications on the PFDs.
58
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used, the Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of
the altimeter and is displayed with a magenta ‘V’ at the top of the scale and a magenta chevron indicating the
baro-VNAV vertical deviation. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” alert. The VDI
is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details
on VNV features, and refer to the Supplemental Flight Data discussionlater in this section for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
EIS
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active
NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope
Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. The Glideslope Preview, a hollow gray diamond,
is displayed when the navigation source is set to GPS, in addition to a localizer frequency being tuned on the
navigation receiver and receiving glideslope information. When the system auto-switches the active navigation
source to the localizer frequency the Glideslope Indicator is displayed as a solid green diamond. If a localizer
frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
NOTE: When the temperature is warmer than a standard day, the system-generated glidepath guidance for
a non-precision approach may cross below the FAF minimum altitude restriction.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for RNAV approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V, Visual). When one of these RNAV approaches is loaded into
the flight plan, GPS is the selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the
Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and
lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits depend on approach service level.
AFCS
• LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, Visual, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
• LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the approach service level downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of
the diamond.
APPENDICES
While executing an SBAS approach with an LNAV/VNAV approach service level, and between the FAF and MAP,
the Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators appear as vertical white lines indicating the area where deviation exceeds
allowable limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/75 feet of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation.
The length of the lines change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators become amber.
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
INDEX
• SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
• The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
• SBAS is manually disabled on the ‘Aux — GPS Status’ Page
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not support
SBAS vertical guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Baro-VNAV is active, the Glidepath Indicator is labeled with a magenta ‘V’ and appears as a magenta
pentagon. The system automatically applies temperature compensation to this displayed glidepath using data
from the aircraft’s temperature probe. This compensation occurs without any action from the flight crew.
NOTE: For information about manually applying temperature compensation to waypoints prior to the Baro-
VNAV approach glidepath becoming active, refer to the Flight Management Section.
EIS
If the Baro-VNAV approach downgrades past the FAF, ‘NO GP’ appears instead of the magenta pentagon.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach or RNP approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical
Deviation Limit Indicators appear as vertical white lines indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators turn amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Glidepath
Indicator
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
APPENDICES
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
INDEX
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
60
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14
12
11
2
10
3
4
9
8
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
4
Navigation Source
5
To/From Indicator
6
Course Pointer
7
Rotating Compass Rose
Lateral Deviation Scale
9
Aircraft Symbol
10
Flight Phase
11
Selected Heading Bug
12
Lubber Line
13
Current Heading
14
Turn Rate Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
Current Track Indicator
EIS
5
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-12 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
AFCS
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities
such as topographical, weather, traffic, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a
combined To/From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a
station, the To/From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI
on the HSI Map can appear either as an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight
Management Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following information appears above the Current Heading when the HSI Map is enabled:
• A sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined)
• OBS Mode/Suspend Mode Status
• Deviation scale
APPENDICES
• Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode Annunciation
• Navigation Source
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
• Flight Phase
INDEX
• Back Course Annunciation (BC)
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the HSI Map, when a localizer is the active navigation source and the difference between the selected
course and current heading is greater than 107°, a ‘BC’ annunciation appears instead of the Flight Phase above
the selected course readout to indicate backcourse sensing is active. This annunciation does not apply to the
HSI when the HSI Map is disabled. In either case, when the system detects LOC BC guidance is active, the
localizer guidance behaves as if a front course were selected.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted or the pilot
selects a different navigation source with the CDI Softkey.
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
EIS
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course
Pointer
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-13 HSI Map
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
1) Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
APPENDICES
2) Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
1) Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
INDEX
2) Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
62
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Current Track
Indicator
Current
Heading
Selected
Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Course
Heading Bug
Figure 2-14 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
EIS
The Current Track Indicator, a magenta diamond connected to a dashed gray line on the HSI, represents the
current over the ground the aircraft is flying.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (True)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• MAGNETIC (º)- Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRUE (ºT)- References angles to true north (T)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
63
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-16 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
TURN RATE INDICATOR
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Standard
Turn Rate
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-17 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
64
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two bearing pointers (the second of which is an optional feature) and associated information can be
displayed on the HSI for the NAV, GPS and ADF sources. The bearing pointers are cyan and are singleline (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the
navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a
white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
EIS
Tuning Mode
Bearing 1
Pointer
Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance
Bearing 2
Pointer
DME Information Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No
Waypoint
Selected
Distance to
Bearing Source
Pointer
Bearing
Icon
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
(Optional)
Figure 2-18 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Bearing
Source
Bearing 1 Information Window
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG = single line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
AFCS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
APPENDICES
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window
under these conditions:
INDEX
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio
installation is optional).
EIS
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM. Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DME.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: DME installation is optional.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
66
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360˚ HSI
EIS
Flight
Phase
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scale
Figure 2-19 Course Deviation Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
AFCS
When navigating with GPS and an ILS or localizer approach is activated, a preview of the approach course is
indicated by the dashed gray pointer and CDI on the HSI. As the aircraft approaches the final approach course,
the two course pointers converge. When the system auto-switches to the localizer NAV source, the pointer and
CDI will change to green.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-20 Navigation Sources
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The FMS supports the use of GPS to aid in the conduct of VOR and VOR/DME approaches. In this configuration,
a preview of the VOR final approach course is displayed on the HSI using the same criteria as used to determine
when the preview for localizer-based approaches is available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR approach preview is not intended to alert the crew to a pending CDI navigation source change,
rather it allows the crew to monitor deviations from the VOR course as a means of complying with the published
approach procedure, while still using GPS to provide a course for the aircraft.
Some VOR approaches are approved for use of GPS as a substitute means of navigation, meaning it is not
necessary to tune or monitor the VOR associated with the approach. These are referred to as “overlay approaches”
and are indicated on the approach selection page by the presence of “GPS” after the VOR or VOR/DME prefix.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system displays “LNAV” or “LNAV+V” after the approach title on the selection page and make vertical
deviation available as appropriate for NDB approaches in a fashion similar to VOR approaches. LNAV approaches
provide lateral GPS-based guidance to legs defined by the navigation database.
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left
corner of the MFD is cyan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The NAV2 standby frequency in
the upper left corner of the MFD is cyan.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AFCS
GPS
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-21 Selecting a Navigation Source
APPENDICES
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan.
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF.
INDEX
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned.
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection.
68
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page and
the full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If
the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the ‘GPS CDI’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-22 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight.
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-23 Automatic CDI Scaling
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway.
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg.
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
AFCS
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
APPENDICES
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm
of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically once the approach
procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
70
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
course width
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
2 nm
angle based
on database
information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
angle set
by system
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
EIS
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV, LNAV+V, and Visual
Approach Service Level CDI Scaling
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV, LP, and LP+V
Approach Service Level CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg.
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg.
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LNAV
AFCS
LNAV+V
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-24)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VISUAL
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
APPENDICES
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-25)
LP
MAPR
INDEX
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
(Nonprecision)
Approach (Nonprecision
with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
Approach (Nonprecision
with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
Approach (LNAV/
VNAV)
Approach (LPV)
Approach (Nonprecision
with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
Approach (LP)
Missed Approach
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary conditions
exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-26 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
NOTE: When OBS mode is active to a VOR waypoint, the course pointer and current track indicator are
AFCS
relative to the published magnetic variation of the VOR which can be outdated with respect to the current
magnetic variation. Consequently, in OBS mode a slight offset may exist between indicated heading and
selected course and track indicator even when there is no crosswind.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing
is suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the figure. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates the
suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn a CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press a CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
72
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label changes
to indicate the suspension is active. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates the suspension and resumes
automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-27 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode. It may also be displayed in
degrees Fahrenheit from the ‘AUX - System Setup’ Page on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Normal Display
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
INDEX
Figure 2-28 Outside Air Temperature
74
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the ‘AUX - System Setup’ Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) and press the ENT Key to confirm
the selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-29 Temperature Selection
(AUX - System Setup Page)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways:
EIS
Option 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Option 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Data
Figure 2-30 Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey.
3) Press one of the option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
AFCS
• Option 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed.
• Option 2: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
76
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANGLE OF ATTACK (AOA) INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator appears on the PFD below the airspeed indicator and is shown
when the Inset Map is not displayed. The AOA Indicator displays the normalized angle of attack. White,
amber, and red arcs indicate AOA ranges. A normalized AOA value of 1.0 corresponds to a stall, and will cause
Low Speed ESP to activate if this condition is reached. The system dynamically calculates the red and amber
arc ranges based on parameters such as bank angle, and flaps position. The red arc begins at the Stall Warning
threshold and ends at 1.0 (Stall threshold). The amber arc represents maneuvering margin to a 35 degree bank
angle. At bank angles of 35 degrees or greater, the amber band has zero thickness. The pointer color matches
the color of the arc associated with the current AOA value.
EIS
The pilot can enable/disable the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD, or select the auto mode. In auto
mode, the AOA Indicator appears when the AOA is 0.2 or greater, or the flaps are partially or fully extended.
Otherwise, the AOA Indicator is removed. Refer to Additional Features section for details regarding the optional
Garmin ESP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The display of the Angle Of Attack indicator is mutually exclusive with the Inset Map. Only one can
be displayed at a time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-31 Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
Selecting the AOA Indicator display mode:
2)
AFCS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
Press the AOA Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the On, Off, or Auto Softkey. Pressing the Auto Softkey shows the AOA Indicator when the normalized
AOA is 0.2 or greater, or when the flaps are partially or fully extended.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-32 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
* If the flight director has been engaged to fly a VNV flight plan, the VNV Target Altitude being held remains displayed
while on level flight plan legs.
INDEX
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
78
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in cyan, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
Inner Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, Altitude Alerting is reset. Altitude Alerting is based on the altitude
information shown on the PFD. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
AFCS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a cyan background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text on
a black background and flashes for 5 seconds and a single chime is heard.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and the
word “Altitude” is heard.
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
APPENDICES
Within 1000 ft
Figure 2-34 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If optional Terrain-SVT or
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B Systems are installed, the Low Altitude annunciation is not shown unless Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B is
inhibited, unavailable, or has failed.
EIS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-35 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the References Window and is reset if the current approach is deleted, another approach is loaded, or on the
next avionics power cycle. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter.
Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the selected altitude on the Altimeter. The
following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA or DH, the bug and text become white.
AFCS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become amber and the voice alert “Minimums.
Minimums” is heard.
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Within 2500 feet
INDEX
Figure 2-36 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
80
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The MDA/DH value is reset if the current approach is deleted, another
approach is loaded, or on the next avionics power cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The climb Baro Transition Alert occurs when
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The descent flight level
Baro Transition Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above
this flight level. The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure
setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight crew can enable/disable each of the baro transition alerts on the Avionics Settings Screen. If the
active flight plan contains an origin airport, the system uses the published transition altitude at the origin
for the climb Baro Transition Alert. If the active flight plan also contains a destination airport, the system
uses the published transition flight level at the destination for the descent baro transition alert. If desired,
the flight crew can also manually change the altitude/flight level for these alerts; a pencil icon next to the
corresponding button indicates a crew-edited value. If the origin or destination airport are unavailable, or
database information is missing, and the flight crew has not manually supplied an altitude/flight level, dashes
appear for the corresponding altitude/flight level buttons until the flight crew enters these values.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Minimums’ Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP.’ ‘Off’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or
turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
AFCS
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-37 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 GARMIN SVT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GARMIN SVT (SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY)
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
EIS
NOTE: Do not use the flight path marker as a flight director.
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
AFCS
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map
display), large water features, towers, wind turbines, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in
the obstacle database. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and
state boundaries are not displayed even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display
also includes a north–south east–west grid with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute
intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is an optional visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts
a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is
29 degrees to the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. In Reversionary Mode, the field of view is 21.5 degrees to
the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the
Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude,
heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arcsecond database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant
features. The terrain data resolution is 4.9 arcseconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored
in squares measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the
required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled (although the softkeys
will still appear functional) until the required data is restored.
Terrain-SVT, which is included with the Garmin-SVT option, or the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning
System (TAWS) provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant
to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Garmin-SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If SVT is enabled
when switching to Reversionary Mode, it will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT
PFD display will be shown in the interim.
INDEX
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Garmin-SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displays.
82
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Airport Signs
• Terrain Alerting
• Pathways
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Runway Display
• Obstacle Alerting including wire obstacles
• Traffic symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Path Marker
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-38 Synthetic Vision Imagery
AFCS
SVT OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
APPENDICES
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD unction
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire. The Back Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Pathways, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated
(gray with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and
Wire Softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled,
the last selected state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire Softkeys is
remembered by the system.
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
• Wire Softkey enables wire obstacle (power line) display.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
Enabling/disabling Wire Obstacles on SVT:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the Wire Softkey.
84
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Flight
Path
Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
Airplane
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT
Softkeys
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Altitude
Figure 2-39 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APT Sign Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
AFCS
Figure 2-40 Airport Signs
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
APPENDICES
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
INDEX
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
86
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind
Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-41 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
HORIZON HEADING
AFCS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PATHWAYS
APPENDICES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
INDEX
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the PFD maps or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
EIS
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Programmed
Altitudes
AFCS
Figure 2-42 Programmed and Selected Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
APPENDICES
DEPARTURE AND ENROUTE
INDEX
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of
the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first
active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of
view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center
of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight plan
legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude selected
or programmed.
88
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT AND APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight, and at the
Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated,
the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a color corresponding to the
selected navigation source and conditions.
EIS
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta Pathways
represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate the ILS/LOC
navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways indicate the anticipated
preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be displayed beginning at the start
of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach vertical guidance, the selected altitude will
be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope. The gray
Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are displayed until they converge with the green glideslope or magenta
glidepath pathways. If approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected Altitude will be
displayed in magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with the
LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and
glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are
displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or
VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
AFCS
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
Figure 2-43 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MISSED APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned in
the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 2-44 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
90
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
AFCS
TERRAIN ALERTING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert
on the navigation maps and ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Pages. For more detailed information
regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDICES
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower or wind
turbine symbols found on map displays. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height
above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the map displays, which color obstacles relative to the
aircraft’s altitude, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warm of potential conflict
with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than
1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude
displays.
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Potential
Impact
Area
Figure 2-45 Terrain Alert
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WIREAWARE POWER LINE OBSTACLES
NOTE: The WireAware obstacle database does not contain all known power lines. And as such, obstacle
avoidance is the sole responsibility of the flight crew.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To enhance safety, SVT incorporates Garmin’s WireAware™ wire obstacle technology. WireAware database
information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which are typically high
voltage transmission lines depicted on the VFR Sectional charts, and are considered of special interest to
pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys, canyons, or be in close proximity to
airports/heliports. For wire obstacles present in the obstacle database, the system shows these on the maps
as well as the Synthetic Vision display; see Hazard Avoidance section for more information about WireAware
alerting.
92
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ZERO PITCH LINE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Cautions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-46 SVT with Obstacle Cautions
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Two dashed lines
forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on
the PFD.
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of
View turned on.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 2-47 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling SVT Field of View on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map Settings’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Map’ Group options to ‘Field of View’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ page.
94
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see the
figure for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location
Lower left of
GPS LOI
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
GPS INTEG OK
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
DR
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-48 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode, the CDI is removed (when GPS is the selected navigation source), and the following
items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
• Current Track Bug
AFCS
• Wind Data
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the sensors exceed
a specified amount, a miscompare annunciation is displayed in black text on an amber background. If one or
both of the sensed values are unavailable, a no compare annunciation is displayed with black text on a white
background. Refer to the Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
EIS
Annunciation
ALT
IAS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HDG
PIT
ROL
ALT
IAS
HDG
PIT
ROL
Condition
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in
sensors is > 10 knots
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in
sensors is > 7 knots.
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
No data from one or both heading sensors.
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
No data from one or both roll sensors.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 2-4 Sensor Comparator Annunciations
REVERSIONARY SENSOR ANNUNCIATIONS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary sensor selection (Dual ADAHRS only) for the AHRS and ADC is annunciated on the above the
roll scale on the PFD. Reversionary sensor selection for the GPS is annunciated to the right of the HSI. These
annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the PFD Opt Softkey accesses the
Sensors Softkey. Pressing the Sensors Softkey accesses the ADC and AHRS softkeys. These softkeys allow
switching of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. With certain types of sensor failures, the system may make
some sensor selections automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
APPENDICES
Reversionary Sensor
Window Text
USING ADC2
USING AHRS2
Condition
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
INDEX
Table 2-5 Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
96
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
EIS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TAWS/Terrain-SVT function is not available, in test mode, or failed
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
SVT IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when
switching to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD
display will be shown in the interim.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High
Nose Low
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-49 Pitch Attitude Warnings
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD and its softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• AFCS Annunciations
• Windows displayed in the
lower right corner of the
PFD:
• Inset Map
EIS
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
• Wind data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Selected Course readout
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Selected Heading readout
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
• Transponder Status Box
• System Time
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
— References Window
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
— Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
— Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
— Messages
• Ground Speed
— Procedures
• True Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
AFCS
Blue Band
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
Figure 2-50 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
98
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for engine operating limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, optional ice protection, and other
system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS information can be fully expanded to an entire page using the Engine Softkey. In Reversionary Mode, the
display combines Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology with the EIS.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR20)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation. When unsafe
operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays, pointers and labels change color corresponding to the
level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at destination). If sensory data to an instrument becomes
invalid or unavailable, an amber 'X' is displayed across the instrument. However, the numeric displays in the 'Fuel
Calculation' Box, 'Anti Ice - TKS' Box (optional), and the density altitude in the 'Air Data' Box are replaced with
dashes instead of 'X's when the data is invalid or out of range.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for engine operating limitations.
1
EIS
2
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
12
5
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
8
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
10
11
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-2 EIS Display (SR20)
100
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
2
3
3
12
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
13
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SR22
(Normally Aspirated)
AFCS
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
12
EIS
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
SR22T
Figure 3-3 EIS Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
Max Continuous Flow
Best Power
Best Economy
Figure 3-4 Fuel Flow Examples
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
101
1 Percent Power
Displays engine power as a percentage
2 Tachometer
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
4 Fuel Quantity
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel
tanks
5 Gallons Used
Displays the fuel used in gallons
6 Oil Temperature
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
7 Oil Pressure
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square
inch (psi)
8 Ammeter
Displays the battery 1 load in amperes
9
Displays the essential bus voltage in volts
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Voltmeter
10 Cylinder Head Temperature
11 Exhaust Gas Temperature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicator
AFCS
12 Fuel Flow
13 Left and Right Turbine Inlet
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour
Displays a cyan target fuel flow indicator for Lean of Peak to the right of
the fuel flow indicator strip (SR20, SR22T)
Displays black band indicator for Rich of Peak and Lean of Peak fuel
flow targets. (SR22) See Figure 3-4 for an example of
Max Continuous Flow, Best Power, and Best Economy
indications
Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet
(SR22T)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT; cylinder
number is shown below bar)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown below
bar)
102
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the Engine Softkey accesses the 'EIS - Engine' Page, which displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation,
electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional Anti-Ice Softkey and the FuelW&B access second-level softkeys.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the limitations in the
current version of the pertinent flight manual. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Level 2
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
Auto
Right
Back
Selects auto tank selection mode
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
Returns to the EIS Display and top-level softkeys
Removes bars and temperature displays from the Engine Temperature Box
Identifies temperature peaks
Full
Tabs
Undo
W&B
Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Displays the Aux - W&B Page
DCLTR
Assist
Fuel-W&B
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
5
AFCS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Left
Anti-Ice
(Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Description
Displays full 'Engine' Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return
to the EIS Display and top-level softkeys
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional -TKS FIKI only; See Operational Note above)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level 3
EIS
Level 1
Engine
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
6
12
7
INDEX
9
8
Figure 3-5 'Engine' Page (SR20)
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
4
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
6
EIS
12
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-6 'Engine' Page (SR22) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
6
12
7
APPENDICES
11
8
INDEX
10
9
Figure 3-7 'Engine' Page (SR22T) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
104
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for engine operating limitations.
Percent Power Indicator
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
Indicator
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
5
Oil Temperature and
Pressure Indicators
6
Electrical Group
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential and
main bus voltage
7
Fuel Calculation Group
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per gallon)
based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
8
Air Data
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C, and
international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation
9
Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks
10
Oxygen Pressure Indicator Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional)
11
Anti-Ice Fluid Quantity
Indicator
12
Engine Temperature Group Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all cylinders in °F
(all models) and turbine inlet temperatures (SR22T only)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour.
(SR20, SR22T Only) Displays a cyan target fuel flow indicator for
Lean of Peak to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip.
(SR22 Only) Displays black band indicator for Rich of Peak and Lean of Peak
fuel flow targets.
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds per
square inch (psi)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L) and
right (R) tanks in gallons (optional – See Operational Note below)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the limitations in the
current version of the pertinent flight manual. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may not represent
all possible aircraft configurations.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles), and economy (Econ) are calculated
based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is based upon
ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for information
regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
1) Press the Engine Softkey to display the 'Engine' Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Fuel-W&B Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10 gallon increments) to
increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Calculated
Fuel Used
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Time
Remaining
Calculated
Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Calculated
Economy
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-8 Fuel Calculations Group
APPENDICES
Change in
Fuel Level
INDEX
Computed
Fuel Remaining
Figure 3-9 Full Fuel (SR22 shown as example)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
106
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TKS FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING (FIKI) ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system interfaces with the optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice system. Refer to the
current version of the pertinent flight manual for a detailed system description of the installed ice protection
system.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the limitations in the
current version of the pertinent flight manual. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
EIS
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the system) modes of operation and a more sophisticated
quantity indicator located on the full 'Engine' Page. To accommodate the additional modes, the TKS FIKI system
employs several additional sensors. The system receives inputs from these sensors and provides indications as
to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTO TANK SELECTION MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the default tank selection mode (Auto), the system assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks are kept
relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. The system uses the anti-ice fluid tank
quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and operating in Auto mode, the shut-off
valves close under the following conditions:
• The fluid quantity is empty (indicated from the fluid level sensor and level switch)
• The left and right tank level imbalance is greater than 0.25 gallons (low tank will be closed until level
balance is within 0.15 gallons)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The fluid quantity is unreliable (a miscompare between the level sensor and level switch or an out of range
level sensor value)
While operating in Auto mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of each fluid
quantity indicator, when both tanks are open (Figure 3-10). During normal operation, the white box will
highlight the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-10 Auto Tank Mode (Normal)
APPENDICES
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level switch for a
particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-11) and that quantity is not
used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is out of range, the fluid quantity
indicator is marked with an amber ‘X’ (Figure 3-12).
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
107
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Figure 3-11 Fluid Level Unreliable
Figure 3-12 Fluid Level Out Of Range
EIS
MANUAL TANK MODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Left Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected by
pressing the Anti-Ice Softkey to access the second-level softkeys Left, Auto, and Right. A cyan box is
displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump operating mode.
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range and
endurance calculations.
• Auto Softkey – returns to Auto tank mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Right Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
Figure 3-13 Manual Tank Mode (Right tank selected)
AFCS
PUMP OPERATING MODES
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the limitations in the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
current version of the pertinent flight manual. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
APPENDICES
Operating Mode
OFF
Norm
High
Max
(momentary)
Pump Bkup
System Operation
System Off
Both pumps operate on a timed, repeating cycle
– 30 seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF
A single pump (#1) operates continuously
Both pumps operate continuously for 120
seconds
A single pump (#2) operates continuously
Comments
No modes selected
Provides 50% flow rate for light/moderate icing 
INDEX
Provides 100% flow rate for moderate icing 
Provides 200% flow rate for severe icing or to
expedite the removal of previous ice buildup 
This mode is used in the event of a timer box
failure or when Backup mode is selected. Pump #2
provides 100% flow rate, bypassing the timer box

 Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for pilot recommended actions
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
108
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Figure 3-16 Max Operating Mode
Figure 3-17 Pump Backup Mode
EIS
Figure 3-15 High Operating Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 3-14 Normal Operating Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the current
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
version of the pertinent flight manual.
A leaning assist function is available on the 'Engine' Page to assist in the leaning process.
Access Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the Engine Softkey to display the 'Engine' Page.
EIS
2) Press the Assist Softkey to identify peaks.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Assist Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a cyan box around
the EGT display of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between the
peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st” is
annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in a cyan box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a cyan marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak, the
last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyan Box
Represents Peak
AFCS
Temperature
Deviation
from Peak
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-18 Leaning Assist Mode
110
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In reversionary mode, the display combines PFD symbology with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview
for information about display Reversionary Mode).
In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the normal EIS Display on the
MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The System Display shows various
system parameters and fuel calculations.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-19 Reversionary Mode (SR22T)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated anytime the initial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
usable fuel is changed.
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for limitations.
In Reversionary Mode, the EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and various
system parameters. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
EIS
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the Engine Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the System Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the Engine or Back Softkey.
1 Percent Power Indicator
Displays engine power as a percentage
2 Tachometer
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicator
4 Fuel Calculation Group
AFCS
5 Electrical Group
Displays engine hours, anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen pressure
(optional)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6 Miscellaneous
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles
per gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the
essential and main bus voltage
112
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SR20
SR22 Models with optional
Anti-Ice and Oxygen
Figure 3-20 System Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
113
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
114
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode A/C or Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram
description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the avionics system is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• PFD/MFD Controller
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME Tuning Window
116
1
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected and
decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Push to move the frequency selected for tuning (cyan digits) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between
COM1 and COM2.
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
4
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Push to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
6
ENT Key – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
8
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
9
10
11
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto- tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Push the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob
moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor
location.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7
12
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
10
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
11
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Push to move the frequency selected for tuning (cyan digits) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1
and NAV2.
12
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Push to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
APPENDICES
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 350/350C/350H/350HC AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24
25
10
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
11
20
21
GMA 350 Controls
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
22
23
26
GMA 350c (Bluetooth) Controls
2
3
27
4
15
28
29
9
12
13
30
5
16
17
18
19
23
29
10
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
11
20
21
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GMA 350H Controls
26
APPENDICES
22
GMA 350Hc (Bluetooth) Controls
INDEX
Figure 4-3 GMA 350/350c/350H/350Hc Audio Panel Controls
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
118
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
5
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
6
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel
Jack. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not connected
to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable
muting during reception.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 or COM3 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM2 or COM1/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
13
MIC2 –Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM3 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM2 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
14
PLAY – Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing begins playing
the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter plays the previous block of
memory.
15
AUX – When selected, audio from the DME (if equipped) can be heard.
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D Audio on/off for all headset
positions.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
APPENDICES
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MUS2 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS2 muting
during reception.
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MUS1 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS1 muting
during reception.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal
is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
119
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between
crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during
PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source
(indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active push
to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, push twice (once to cancel the cursor,
twice to activate Blue-Select mode).
22
Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) A flashing blue annunciator indicates the unit is
discoverable. A solid blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection.
23
 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the  audio source. Press
the  key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE to
BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an
audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
24
MUS1 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1 audio source.
Press the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE:
The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to
an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
AFCS
25
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MUS2 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS2 audio source.
Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE:
The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to
an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
26
Control Knob Push and Hold – (GMA 350c/350Hc only) Push and hold for two seconds to enable the
GMA 350c as discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator with flash to indicate that the unit is
discoverable. The unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established.
Once a successful pair is established, the audio “Bluetooth paired” is played.
27
COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
28
 Key Annunciator – (350Hc only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the  audio source. Press
the  key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to GREEN to
INDEX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
17
APPENDICES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
120
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BLUE. GREEN selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an
audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and GREEN.
MIC3 –Selects the #3 transmitter for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 or COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode
(using COM1/COM3 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered
COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
30
EIS
MUSIC Key Annunciator (GMA 350H only) or MUS Key Annunciator (GMA 350Hc only) – Assigns
the Bluetooth device to the MUSIC or MUS audio source. Press the MUSIC or MUS key until the
annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to GREEN to BLUE. GREEN selects
the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can
only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the
remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and GREEN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
29
PFD/MFD CONTROLLER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD/MFD Controller is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and
transponder control. Many procedures can be performed using the PFD/MFD Controller rather than the MFD/
PFD display bezel controls. Annunciators above the CRS, XPDR, NAV, and COM Keys are illuminated when
their respective control modes are selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM and NAV radio tuning can be accomplished from the PFD/MFD Controller. The appropriate frequency
box on the selected display is outlined by a cyan selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate PFD/
MFD Controller activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of
the previous radio tuning mode.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
2
3
4
5
6
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
8
9
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
14
10
11
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
12
Figure 4-4 PFD/MFD Controller
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Selection Box
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
2
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3
FMS Knob – Activates the PFD/MFD Controller cursor on pages that allow flight crew data input. It is
used to select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when a NRST or WPT Window is present. Push the FMS
Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small
knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
4
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the PFD/MFD Controller. The COM tuning box is
outlined with a cyan selection line when the COM frequency is active on the PFD/MFD Controller.
5
BLUE Indicators – Indicates one of four modes is always active. Pressing the COM, NAV, CRS or XPDR
key selects that mode.
6
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the PFD/MFD Controller. The NAV tuning box is outlined
with a cyan selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the PFD/MFD Controller.
INDEX
1
APPENDICES
AFCS
Figure 4-5 Frequency Tuning with the PFD/MFD Controller
122
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
IDENT Key – Pressing the IDENT key sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). A
green IDENT indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of
18 seconds. A white IDENT indicator is displayed on the PFD/MFD Controller.
10
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
11
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
12
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
13
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob to select
characters/numbers). The numeric keys are white when entering data on the MFD and blue when entering
radio frequencies and transponder codes.
14
HOME Key – Defaults to Navigation Map on the MFD.
15
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob – Dual concentric knob used for data entry in one of four modes. NAV/
COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode: Acts as the XPDR Softkey.
EIS
8
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
XPDR Key – Places PFD/MFD Controller in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be performed
with either the number keypad or COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TUNING BOXES
1
2
3
4
5
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
Figure 4-6 COM Tuning Box Indications
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
1
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on
the Audio Panel (MIC1 Key or MIC2 Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that
no COM radio is selected for transmitting.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the frequency
that is selected for tuning. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for frequency transfer between the
Standby and Active fields.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either cyan or gray. The standby frequency that
is selected for tuning is cyan. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Selected Tuning Frequency – The frequency selected for tuning is cyan and moves between the upper and
lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which standby COM transceiver
frequency is selected for tuning.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
124
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
7
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
EIS
6
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Push the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Manual frequency tuning from the PFD/MFD Controller:
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
APPENDICES
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
190-02183-02 Rev. A
• ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’ Page
• ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’ Page
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (PFD)
• ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page
• ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
EIS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the Nearest Softkey to open the
‘Nearest Airports’ Window
Figure 4-7 ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (PFD)
APPENDICES
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
INDEX
From certain pages in the NRST or WPT page groups, COM Frequencies can be automatically loaded into
any of the standby or active locations on the COM Frequency Box. If a frequency is loaded into an Active COM
126
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
location, the previously active frequency will be transferred into the standby location. Highlighting a frequency
that can be auto-tuned and pressing the ENT Key will display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window. Pressing the
ENT Key again will Load the frequency into a Standby location, or Transfer/Load the frequencies in the Active
locations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting an Active COM Location will
transfer the current frequency into the
standby location as well as load the new
frequency into the Active location.
EIS
Figure 4-8 Auto-Tuning a COM Frequency ‘Load Frequency’ Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pushing the FMS Knob or
pressing the appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency field.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the selected COM frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu .
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the selected COM frequency field.
APPENDICES
Nearest Frequencies Menu
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-9 Nearest Pages Menus
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pushing the FMS
Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency can be transferred to the desired COM field by pressing the
ENT Key. to bring up the ‘Load Frequency’ Window, selecting the desired COM field, and pressing the ENT
Key again.
EIS
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway Information
Press ENT Key to
display the ‘Load
Frequency’ Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press INFO 1 Softkey
for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
AFCS
Turn the FMS Knob to
select the desired COM
field location. Press the
ENT Key again to load
the frequency into the
selected location.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-10 ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Screen COM Auto-Tune
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’, ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’,
and ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
128
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the ‘AUX - System Setup 2’ Page of the AUX Page Group.
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the ‘AUX – System Setup 2’ Page.
EIS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the ‘COM Configuration Box.’
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the ‘COM Configuration’ Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-11 ‘AUX – System Setup 2’ Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV TUNING BOXES
EIS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are
on the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either cyan or gray. The standby frequency
selected for tuning is cyan. The other standby frequency is gray.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the frequency
that is selected for tuning. Indicates which NAV transceiver is selected for frequency transfer between the
Standby and Active fields.
3
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI Softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
4
Selected Tuning Frequency – The frequency selected for tuning is cyan and moves between the upper and
lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which standby NAV frequency is
selected for tuning.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 Key or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pushing the VOL/
ID Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio selected for tuning. To turn on/off both NAV
IDs, transfer the selected radio between NAV1 and NAV2 by pushing the small NAV Knob and pushing the
VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pushing
the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
7
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-12 NAV Tuning Box Indications
130
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the MFD; two standby fields and two active
fields. The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
AFCS
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier can be accomplished by selecting the
corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pushing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, or AUX Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selection of the AUX Key selects and
deselects the DME (if equipped). Selected audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFD.
APPENDICES
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
4) Push the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manual frequency tuning from the PFD/MFD Controller:
1) Press the NAV Key to select the NAV frequency box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page
• ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page
• ‘WPT – VOR Information’ Page
• ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page
• ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’ Page (FSS, WX)
• ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’ Page
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from the NRST and WPT page groups. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From certain pages in the NRST or WPT page groups, NAV Frequencies can be automatically loaded into
any of the standby or active locations on the NAV Frequency Box. If a frequency is loaded into an Active
NAV location, the previously active frequency will be transferred into the standby location. Hightlighting
a frequency that can be auto-tuned and pressing the ENT Key will display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window.
Pressing the ENT Key again will Load the frequency into a Standby location, or Transfer/Load the frequencies
in the Active locations.
AFCS
Selecting an Active NAV Location will
transfer the current frequency into the
standby location as well as load the new
frequency into the Active location.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-13 Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency ‘Load Frequency’ Window
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pushing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports Pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window.
INDEX
5) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV frequency Field.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV frequency Field.
132
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD Controller to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Load Frequency’ Window.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV frequency field.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV frequency field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Figure 4-14 Nearest Pages Menus
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
AFCS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey,
the ‘Load Frequency’ Box is displayed with the ENT Key, and the frequency loaded into the NAV Tuning Box
with the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
List of nearest
VORs.
VOR
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press FREQ
Softkey to place
the cursor in the
‘Frequency’ Field
Press ENT Key to
display the ‘Load
Frequency’ Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the FMS Knob to
select the desired NAV
field location. Press the
ENT Key again to load
the frequency into the
selected location.
Figure 4-15 Loading the NAV Frequency from the ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page
AFCS
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page,
‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page, ‘WPT – VOR Information’ Page, and ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’ Page on
the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
APPENDICES
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
INDEX
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active frequency
Field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to standby.
134
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency Field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
EIS
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects any
marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft. Marker beacon audio is by default configured
off and must be enabled after each power cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD. Operation of the two
marker beacon indications may not be synchronized.
GMA 350/350c
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-16 Marker Beacon Keys and Annunciator Lights
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when the annunciator is off or when the
annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE
annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and
marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception (once to
mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the Avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV
frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The ‘DME Tuning’ Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ‘DME Tuning’ Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the ‘DME Tuning’ Window on and off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DME
Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-17 ‘DME Tuning’ Window
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AFCS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the ‘DME Tuning’ Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pushing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ‘DME Tuning’ Window.
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
136
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system is equipped with a Mode S Transponder. The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and
Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the
following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
EIS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
137
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder is
powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted. When Standby is selected,
a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-19 Standby Mode
APPENDICES
MANUAL ON MODE
INDEX
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
138
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
EIS
Figure 4-20 On Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALTITUDE MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
On-Ground ALT Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airborne ALT Mode
AFCS
Figure 4-21 Altitude Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
REPLY STATUS
APPENDICES
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to Interrogation
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 4-22 Reply Indication
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
EIS
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a Code
Figure 4-23 Entering a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
AFCS
Entering a transponder code with the PFD/MFD Controller FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
APPENDICES
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
INDEX
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
140
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR Code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 4-24 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the PFD IDENT Softkey or PFD/MFD Controller IDENT key sends a distinct identity indication to
Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air
traffic controller’s screen. The PFD IDENT Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the
IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDENT indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the Transponder
Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds. A white IDENT indicator is displayed on the PFD/MFD Controller.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ident Indication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the Ident Softkey to
Initiate the ID Function
AFCS
IDENT
Indication
Press the
IDENT key to
Initiate the ID
Function
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-25 IDENT Softkey and Indication
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use. Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset
channel output to ground. While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural
headset hears only the left channel in both ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions,
any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode (if configured). PA Mode is
annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Pushto-Talk” Button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
configuration.
AFCS
SPLIT-PA MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA announcements.
To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM Mode by pressing more than one MIC Key simultaneously,
then press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
APPENDICES
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
INDEX
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
142
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS) WITH THE GMA 350/350C
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GMA 350/350c includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/
entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger
audio isolation.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to enable intercom audio for the selected position. If the
annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is
isolated from the others.
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled and the copilot
headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio distribution.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT Key
disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration between passenger
and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot Configured as Crew” is heard.
INTERCOM MODES
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
AFCS
All Intercom Mode
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft audio.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Pilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Passenger/Crew Isolate Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other. The
Passengers hear each other.
EIS
Copilot Isolate Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Pilot and Passengers
also hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All Isolate Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use SplitCOM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
Pilot & Copilot Isolate Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers
hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode
APPENDICES
Pilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
INDEX
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear
each other.
144
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Copilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot can hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has
the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BLUE-SELECT MODE (TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT DISTRIBUTION)
EIS
GMA 350
GMA 350c
GMA 350H
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The music (MUS1/MUS2/MUSIC/MUS) and telephone/entertainment (
) audio are distributed using
the Blue-Select Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear
the telephone/entertainment audio.
GMA 350Hc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-26 Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pushing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing white
annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, push the small knob twice. The first push
will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
AFCS
The annunciator over the
Key will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue annunciator on
or off to distribute the telephone/entertainment audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large
knob to select MUS1, MUS2, MUSIC, or MUS and select the crew positions to receive the music audio.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting any key other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS1, MUS2, MUSIC, MUS or
will cancel
Blue-Select Mode. Pushing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds
with no input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
Adjusting Intercom Volume
APPENDICES
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom volume
for the listener.
Adjusting Speaker Volume
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected
sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume control knob.
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Adjusting MKR, AUX,
, MUS1, MUS2, MUSIC, and MUS Volume
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
, MUS1, MUS2, MUSIC or MUS, the Volume Control Knob
adjusts the individual volume of the selected source.
Adjusting Manual Squelch
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the
volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Volume or
Cursor
Off for Automatic Squelch, On for Manual Squelch
Manual Squelch
Figure 4-27 Volume/Squelch Control
SPLIT COM MODE WITH THE GMA 350/350C/350H/350HC
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close together, interference may be heard
during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, AUX, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able to
monitor the higher numbered COM (COM2 or COM3).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selection of more than one MIC Key selects Split COM operation (using COM1/COM2, COM1/COM3, or
COM2/COM3). The COM1/MIC1, COM2/MIC2, or COM3/MIC3 annunciators are illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. The selected COM frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher
numbered COM. The MIC1 or MIC2 (depends on COMs selected for Split-COM) Annunciator flashes when
the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The MIC2 or MIC3 (depends on COMs selected for Split-COM)
Annunciator flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
Figure 4-28 Split COM Selected
146
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3D AUDIO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3D Audio is useful when multiple COM audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear,
3D audio processing creates the illusion that each COM audio source is coming from a unique location in the
horizontal plane.
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
EIS
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position.
All other audio inputs are processed so that the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock position.
ENABLING 3D AUDIO
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
1)
Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
mono
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right shorted together)
2)
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
3)
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in both ears. “3D
audio left” not heard
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left or left/right swapped)
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
APPENDICES
Mono headset in use
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears,
2)
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
both ears
3)
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
Use a stereo headset
3)
AFCS
Stereo headset in use with
2)
mono/stereo switch set to
‘mono’
Aircraft wiring has left audio 3)
wired to both left and right
channels of stereo headset jack
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Symptom(s)
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears.
“3D audio right” message 2)
not heard
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When
3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right” in
the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the cause
may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring problem
is suspected.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in right ear only
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
left ear only
2)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in left ear only, no
audio heard in right ear.
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in right ear only, no
audio heard in left ear
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Stereo headset is on backwards 1) Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
on each side of the headset or the position of the
boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position information
will be swapped.
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/ 2) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
right channels swapped)
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left, or left/right swapped)
See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
headsets.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BLUETOOTH® (GMA 350c/350Hc ONLY)
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the GMA 350c.
Once paired, the GMA 350c and the device will connect automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE AUDIO PANEL
Push and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the unit
is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The Audio Panel will remain
discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the Bluetooth Annunciator
turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth connected/paired” is heard.
AFCS
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the , MUS1, MUS2, or MUS Key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth
source will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE. WHITE
selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source assignment will
persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is
APPENDICES
assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
INDEX
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired audio
source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening to that source
can also speak on the call through the headset MICs.
148
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the 2 second push and hold of the inner knob discussed above, the knob has two additional
functions that are intended to be seldom or never used. The following functions are available if needed for
troubleshooting:
• Push and hold the inner knob for 5 seconds to turn off the Bluetooth radio. The aural message “Bluetooth
off” is heard. This function electrically turns off the radio, not just the audio source selection. In the event
that Bluetooth radio interference with communication or navigation equipment is suspected, the Bluetooth
radio can be powered off without powering off the entire audio panel. A subsequent 5 second push and
hold turns the radio back on.
EIS
• Push and hold the inner knob for 10 seconds to clear the memory of paired devices (up to 10 are stored).
Once cleared, the aural message “Bluetooth list cleared” is heard. This function is used as a troubleshooting
method when a device is not pairing, or to remove a device that is no longer needed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM
transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Verify that the PILOT , COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the Blue-Select Mode to distribute the telephone/entertainment and music appropriately.
4) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
150
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the avionics components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during fail-safe operation.
EIS
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
COM TUNING FAILURE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, an amber or red X may appear
on the frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
151
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
152
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V,
LPV), Visual Approach (VISUAL), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in the lower
left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed in the center of
the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A PFD Map is displayed by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing either the Inset Map or HSI Map
Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the Inset Map can be reduced by selecting the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then selecting the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The ‘Direct To’ Window, the ‘Flight Plan’ Window, the ‘Procedures’ Window, and the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (Inset Map)
Navigation Status Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
Current Track Indicator
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
AFCS
HSI Map
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (HSI Map)
154
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport Info
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Fuel Over Destination
- Identifier
- Distance
- Bearing
Display Title
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Map
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
Symbol
Description
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The symbols used in the PFD Status Box are:
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
APPENDICES
Active Leg
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Right Holding Pattern
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• BRG
(Bearing)
• FOD (Fuel over destination)
• CCG
(Current climb gradient)
• GAGL (GPS altitude AGL)
• DEST
(Destination airport identifier)
• GS
(Groundspeed)
• DIS
(Distance)
• ISA
(Temperature at standard pressure)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• DNALT (Density altitude)
• LDG (ETA at final destination)
• DTG
(Distance to go to destination)
• MSA (Minimum safe altitude)
• DTK
(Desired tack)
• TAS
(True airspeed)
• END
(Endurance)
• TKE
(Track angle error)
• ESA
(Enroute safe altitude)
• TOD (Time to TOD)
• ETA
(Estimated time of arrival)
• TRK
(Track)
• ETE
(Estimated time enroute)
• VSR
(Vertical speed required)
• FLT
(Flight timer)
• XTK
(Cross-track error)
• FOB
(Fuel on board)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box
on the ‘Aux-System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
156
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography data
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Topography scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
• All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
• Direct To Window
• ‘Aux – Trip Planning’ Page (‘Aux’)
• PFD Maps
• Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
• Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The North Up Above setting configures the map to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the
map range reaches a minimum range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: The orientation setting for system maps may only be changed from the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page
EIS
while in normal display mode. The flight plan map orientation may be changed from the ‘FPL – Active Flight
Plan’ Page while operating in split screen display mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Settings
Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
North Up Above Field
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Window
158
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group if necessary and press the ENT Key. Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to
select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
EIS
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
Enabling/disabling North Up Above and selecting the minimum switching range:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
MAP RANGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. When the map range
is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map, a magnifying
glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise
to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto Zoom On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-9 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any navigation map displaying
traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic advisory. When
terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the active waypoint.
AFCS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum look forward times (set on the
‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the
auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
APPENDICES
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/ minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘Time Out’ Field (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘Time Out’ Field to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
INDEX
• When the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available (1000
nm).
• When the ‘Min Look FWD’ Field is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
160
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS
Knob.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
11) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP PANNING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint
AFCS
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• Graphically create user waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Measure the bearing and distance from the aircraft present position to any location on the navigation map, or
between any two points on the navigation map
• View obstacle, airspace, and airway information
APPENDICES
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map Pointer
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Information about
Point of Interest
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer on
POI
APPENDICES
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
INDEX
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
162
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Panning the map:
1) With the desired map page displayed, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the
Map Pointer on a waypoint.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Information Page and return to the ‘Map –
Navigation Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer. Place the Map
Pointer on the boundary of an airspace. Information about the airspace is displayed on the map next to the map
pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and center the map on the aircraft.
Or:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer. Place the Map
Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Information’
Window for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
AFCS
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing and
distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying points
with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance, and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a window
at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
INDEX
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page Menu
and press the ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Measurement Line
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
TOPOGRAPHY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
AFCS
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures. Topographic data
can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation map. In addition, the
Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the map) showing a
scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
APPENDICES
TER Softkey 'Off'
TER Softkey
'Topo'
TOPO On
INDEX
TOPO Off
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
164
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Topo Data On
Topo Data Off
Figure 5-14 HSI Map - Topographic Data
EIS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Minimum Displayed Elevation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
166
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
EIS
(Route) or
User Waypoint
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
40
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
50
400
International Highway (Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
10
100
4
25
Railroads (RAILROAD)
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
750
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
25
(Airport)
Highways and Roads
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
N/A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Local Road (Local Road)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
400
25
150
1.5
5
Runway Extension
7.5
150
Intersection (INT)
10
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR
50
250
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
40
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
50
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft., or
Longest Runway < 5000 ft. with control tower)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft without control tower)
and Heliports
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
See Additional Features
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
AFCS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace Symbols
168
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
*
*
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
*
*
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
*
*
Class B/Terminal Manoeuvring Area** and surrounding
airways**
(CL B/TMA/AWY)
50
150
Class C Airspace/Control Area
(CL C/CTA)
50
100
Class D Airspace/ Class A Airspace
(CL A/D)
10
100
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
50
100
Military Operations Areas
(MOA (Military))
50
250
50
250
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Restricted and Prohibited Areas
(Restricted)
ADIZ, Alert, Danger, and Warning
(Other)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airspace Symbols
(see below)
EIS
ADIZ
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert
Danger/Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* Label placement and range is determined by the system for best display and minimal clutter
** Applies to European airspace only
Table 5-3 Airspace Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ Group items:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary for subsequent fields.
9) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Item
Detail 3
Detail 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
SafeTaxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
VRPs
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA/AWY
Class C Airspaces/CTA
Class A/D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
APPENDICES
Decluttering the map:
Press the Detail Softkey with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown.
With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed.
INDEX
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key to apply the next declutter level and return to the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
170
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
AIRWAYS
EIS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. The Airway range
can also be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific
number.
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
Table 5-5 Airways Symbol Information
EIS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (‘AWY LO’).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (‘AWY HI’).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (‘AWY Off’).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or the ‘High ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’. Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
APPENDICES
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page
172
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. Selected Altitude Intercept Arc, Track
Vector, Wind Vector, Fuel Range Ring, SVT Field of View, and Glide Range Ring) can be displayed/removed
individually.
See the Hazard Avoidance Section for information on displaying obstacles (Point Obstacle, Wire Obstacle) on
the map.
Setting up additional ‘Map’ Group items:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Push the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map.
TRACK VECTOR
AFCS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track
vector is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track
vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always
a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Track Vector
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
NOTE: Selected Altitude Intercept Arc is not displayed on any Waypoint Page Group maps, Procedure Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
maps, or the Stored Flight Plan Page map.
WIND VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the MFD. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater
than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
AFCS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Information pages.
174
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Time to Reserve Fuel
Total Endurance Range
Range to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
Field of View is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
NOTE: Field of View will not be depicted on the NRST Page Group maps.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Field of View
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
GLIDE RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map and PFD Map can display a glide range ring that can determine how far the aircraft
can glide before reaching 1000’ AGL under optimal aircraft glide configuration. When enabled, the glide
range ring will be displayed at or above 1000’ AGL as a solid cyan line projected around the aircraft. Altitude,
winds, turning factors and terrain will change the size and shape of the ring.
NOTE: The system will utilize the optimal glide range indicated airspeed at a zero flap setting as one factor
EIS
in calculating the Glide Range Ring. Reference the current pertinent flight manual for the aircraft glide
airspeed.
NOTE: The aircraft will always be displayed inside the Glide Range Ring, regardless of extreme winds higher
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
than the aircraft’s optimal glide range airspeed.
Wind offsetting
glide range ring
downwind
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain (valley)
extending glide
range
Figure 5-22 Glide Range Ring
DESTINATION AIRPORT INFORMATION
AFCS
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
• The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if:
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
• The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure(s) in the active flight plan if:
INDEX
APPENDICES
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
176
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
- The approach is active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The destination airport is the Direct-to waypoint if:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination information
fields are shown as dashes.
EIS
If FOD is positive, but 18 gallons or less, the FOD value is shown is amber. If FOD is zero or negative, the
FOD value is shown in red.
Enroute
Distance
Estimated
Time Enroute
Fuel Remaining
at Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Valid Destination Airport
Bearing
to Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Invalid Destination Airport
Figure 5-23 Destination Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on auto-tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As
a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the system scrolls through the database, displaying
those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the
selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on any of the waypoint pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Identifier Entry Field
Facility Entry Field
City Entry Field
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Identifier Symbol
Entered Waypoint on Map
Waypoint Location
AFCS
Figure 5-24 ‘Waypoint Information’ Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate
Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
178
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-25 ‘Waypoint Information’ Window – Duplicate Identifier
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
AIRPORT INFORMATION
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the ‘WPT – Airport
Information’ Page Map.
AFCS
The ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport
information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures
that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on
loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page defaults to the
airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport.
On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the ‘WPT – Airport
Information’ Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on
the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘Info 1’ is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
– ID/Facility/City
– Usage Type/Region
– Lat/Long/Elev
– Fuel Available
– Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
EIS
– Designation
– Length/Width/Surface
– Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
– Identification
– Frequency
– Availability
– Additional Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-26 ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
– ID/Facility/City
– Usage Type/Region
Figure 5-27 Airport Directory Page Example
180
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FBO: Name/Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards,
Phone/Fax, Hours Internet, Courtesy
Car
Weather Contacts: Service Type
and Frequencies/Phone (AWOS/
ASOS)
Approaches: Types
Aircraft Businesses/Clubs:
Name, Type (sales, training,
servicing), Frequencies/Phone/Fax,
Credit Cards, Internet, Services
Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
Attractions: Hotels, Museums,
Raceways, Golfing, etc.
Elevation: Airfield Elev (ft)
NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
Mag Var: Airfield Mag Var
(degrees)
Airport Manager: Phone
AFCS
Restaurants: On the Field and
Nearby
General Information and/or
Notes: Fees, Airport Notes, local
area information
Transportation: Taxi Services, Car
Rentals, Type and Availability (public,
shuttle, limo, etc.)
Charts: VFR Sectional
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Special Operations at Airport:
Helicopters, etc.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
Attendance: Annual, weekly, daily,
hours
Pattern Altitudes: Aircraft Class/
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
Control Tower: Full/Part-time
Hours, Days Open
Noise Abatement: Flying
Procedures
EIS
Airport: Identifier, Type, Name,
City, State, Map
Facility Hours and Lighting:
Hours operating, Type and Location,
CTAF, beacon colors
Runways: Headings, Length,
Width, Facility Obstructions, Surface,
Condition, Clearance Slope
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘WPT – Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info
Softkey until ‘Info 2’ is displayed. The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and AC-U-KWIK
Airport Directory databases provide detailed information. Both directories are available for downloading
at flygarmin.com, however copy only one of the databases to the Supplemental Data Card since the system
cannot recognize both databases simultaneously. The following are types of airport directory information
shown (if available) on the ‘WPT – Airport Directory’ Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
FSS
Terminal *
AWOS
Gate
TMA *
Center
Ground *
Tower
Class B *
Helicopter
TRSA *
Class C *
Multicom
Unicom
Clearance
Other
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’
Page. See the Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be
selected for display (see the Hazard Avoidance Section for details about weather).
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), push the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location within the ‘Airport’ Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
AFCS
1) With the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the flashing cursor, push the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
INDEX
APPENDICES
From the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination
Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
182
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEAREST AIRPORT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window displays a list
of up to 25 of the nearest airports. If there are more than three they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there
are no airports within 200 NM available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
EIS
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
– Identification
– Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-28 ‘Nearest Airports’ Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD ‘Airport Information’ Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
AFCS
Airport Information
– ID/Type/City
– Facility
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Information
– Usage/Time/Elev
– Region
Airport Information
– Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-29 ‘Airport Information’ Window on PFD
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Airport Information’
Window.
3) To return to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’
Window.)
EIS
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential
use in the event of an in-flight emergency. The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed
white line is drawn on the navigation map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. The currently
selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the page displays
nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’, ‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’,
and ‘Approaches’. If there are more than can be shown in the given box, each list can be scrolled. If there are
no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
Nearest Airports
– ID/Type
– Bearing/Distance
Nearest Airport
Airport Information
AFCS
– Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
– Designation/Surface
– Length/Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
– Identification
– Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Figure 5-30 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Window Selection
Softkeys
Approaches Available
184
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:.
1) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may
already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the APT Softkey; or push the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Nearest Airport’ Box on the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page defines the minimum runway length and
surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’
Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways
or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or
meters) for runway length and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/ Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob or keypad to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NON-AIRPORT AND USER CREATED WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All other waypoints include Intersections, VORs, NDBs, VRPs, and User Waypoints. For each of these
waypoints, their respective information pages will show a map of the currently selected waypoint, the
waypoint identifier, and location. Additionally, intersections will show the nearest VOR while both the VOR
and NDB waypoints will show their frequency and the nearest airport. User Waypoint information also
provides the waypoint type (radial/radial, radial/DME, or latitude/longitude), temporary status, comments,
and a User Waypoint list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The ‘VOR Information’ Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly tune a VOR or ILS frequency. If a VOR station is combined
with a TACAN station it is listed as a VOR-TACAN on the ‘VOR Information’ Page and if it includes only DME,
it is displayed as VOR-DME. Also, the VOR class (Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal) will be shown
in the VOR ‘Information’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Map, ‘Aux – Trip Planning’ Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position
on the map using the Joystick, or from the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page by referencing a bearing/
distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased
upon system power down.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the ‘WPT – Intersection Information’ Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily
the VOR used to define the intersection.
AFCS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
– Region
– Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
– Identifier/Type
(symbol)
– Radial to VOR
– Distance to VOR
APPENDICES
Selected Waypoint:
Intersection
(as seen here)
NDB
VOR
VRP, or
User Waypoint
INDEX
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Page (Intersection Example)
186
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VOR Identifier/Type
NDB Information
VOR Information
NDB Frequency
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Nearest Airport Info
– Facility Name
– Nearest City
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Bearing/Distance to
Airport
– VRP Name
– Country
– Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
– Lat/Long
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Bearing/Distance to
Airport
User Waypoint Info
– Identifier
– Temporary/Normal
– Waypoint Type
– Waypoint Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VRP Information
– Class/Magnetic Variation
– Region
– Lat/Long
EIS
VRP Identifier/Symbol
– Facility Name
– Nearest City
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– Type
– Region
– Lat/Long
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDB Identifier/Type
User Waypoint Comment
Reference Waypoint Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Identifier/Rad/Dist or
– Identifiers/Radials or
– Region/Lat/Long
User Waypoint List
– Identifier/ Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Pages (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User Waypoint)
Viewing Waypoint Information:
1) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the ‘WPT – (Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPT) Information’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User Waypoint Box.
AFCS
3) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
4) Press the ENT Key, if needed.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEAREST WAYPOINTS
APPENDICES
The Nearest pages can be used to quickly find waypoints close to the aircraft. The system will display
a scrollable list of up to 25 nearest waypoints with bearing and distance from the aircraft, a map of the
surrounding area, and additional information particular to the type of waypoint chosen. A white arrow before
the waypoint identifier/name indicates the currently selected waypoint shown on the map, with its associated
information in the lower box or boxes:
– The ‘NRST – Nearest Intersection’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and a
‘Reference VOR’.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
– The ‘NRST – Nearest NDB’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
The NDB ‘Information’ Box will show a Compass Locator if the NDB is associated with either a Locator
Outer Marker (LOM) or Locator Middle Marker (LMM).
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
– The ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
The NAV frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page via the
FREQ Softkey. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– The ‘NRST – Nearest VRP’ Page will show two boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. Information
will contain the VRP Name, Country and latitude/longitude.
– The ‘NRST – Nearest User WPTS’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest User’, ‘Information’, and
‘Reference Waypoints’. Information will include any Comments and the latitude/longitude. The ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box will provide a reference NAVAID with a radial/DME that coincides with the User Waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The nearest non-airport waypoint list will only include waypoints within 200nm. If there are no waypoints
in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest waypoints will be displayed, and the information and
frequency fields (if applicable) will be dashed.
Nearest Intersections
– White arrow indicates
the selected waypoint
shown.
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Showing Nearest
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest Non-Airport
Waypoint:
Intersection Info
– Lat/Long
AFCS
Intersection –
NDB –
VOR –
VRP –
User Waypoint –
Reference VOR Info
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Radial to VOR
– Distance to VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-33 ‘NRST – Nearest Intersection’ Page
188
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
– NDB Identifier/Symbol
– Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Nearest VOR
– VOR Identifier/Symbol
– Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest NDB
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
– Facility Name/City
– Class/Magnetic Variation
– Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
VOR Frequency
Nearest VRP
Nearest User Wpt List
– Identifier
– Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– VRP Identifier/Symbol
– Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Information
– Facility Name/City
– Type
– Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Information
AFCS
– VRP Name
– Country
– Lat/Long
User Waypoint Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VRP Information
– Comment
– Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
APPENDICES
– Identifier
– Radial/Distance
Figure 5-34 Nearest Waypoints (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User WPTS)
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing Nearest Non-Airport Waypoints:
1) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the ‘NRST – Nearest (Intersections, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPTS)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the ‘Nearest (INT, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User)’ Box.
Or:
If the ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page is displayed, to display the flashing cursor and press the VOR Softkey; or press
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) If needed, press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob as needed to select an identifier.
EIS
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Map, ‘Aux – Trip Planning’ Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page by referencing a bearing/distance
from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different types of user waypoints are Route and Airport. Elevation must be entered for User Airport
waypoints. A Route User Waypoint may have up 6 characters in the waypoint name. However, the waypoint
name for a User Airport is limited to 4 characters.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Temporary user waypoints, as indicated by a green check mark in the ‘Temporary’ Field, will be automatically
deleted upon the next power cycle. The default storage setting for creating a new user waypoint can be
changed from the ‘Waypoint Setup’ Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. A new comment may be entered, limited to 25 characters.
190
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
User Airport Symbol
User Waypoint Name
Waypoint Type
Route or Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Elevation must be entered
for User Airport
Waypoint Mode
Comment Field
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LAT/LON Coordinates
Reference Waypoint
Radial/Distance
User Waypoint – RAD/DIS Mode
User Airport – LAT/LON Mode
Route User Waypoint Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Elevation for Route Waypoints
Temporary Storage Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System Generated Comment
Reference Waypoint Radials
AFCS
User Waypoint – RAD/RAD Mode
Figure 5-35 User Waypoint Types and Modes of Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
User waypoints can be created from the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page:
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
APPENDICES
2) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter a user waypoint name.
3) Press the ENT Key to finish entering the waypoint name. By default, the new waypoint is created as a Route
waypoint type using the RAD/DIS mode of reference. The current aircraft position is the default location of the
new waypoint.
4) Setting the Waypoint Type:
INDEX
If the waypoint will be a ‘Route’ waypoint, press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) If the waypoint will be an ‘Airport’ waypoint, turn the FMS Knobs to highlight ‘Airport’ press the ENT Key.
Press the ENT Key again to close the popup window regarding valid elevation.
b) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter the airport elevation and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) With the ‘Temporary’ Field highlighted, press the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box to change the storage
method to temporary or normal, as desired.
6) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Waypoint Mode’ Field. If desired, change the waypoint mode of
reference in one of the following ways:
EIS
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
7) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the field in the ‘Comment’ Box. If desired, use the FMS Knobs or keypad
to change the comment (limited to 25 characters).
8) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the Waypoint Name.
2) Enter a user waypoint name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint AAAAAA?’ is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The new waypoint is created by default as a Route waypoint type
using the RAD/DIS mode of reference. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
5) Setting the Waypoint Type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the waypoint will be a ‘Route’ waypoint, press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If the waypoint will be an ‘Airport’ waypoint, turn the FMS Knobs to highlight ‘Airport’ press the ENT Key.
Press the ENT Key again to close the popup window regarding valid elevation.
APPENDICES
6) With the ‘Temporary’ Field highlighted, press the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box to change the storage
method to temporary or normal, as desired.
INDEX
b) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter the airport elevation and press the ENT Key.
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad
7) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Waypoint Mode’ Field. If desired, change the waypoint mode of
reference in one of the following ways:
Or:
192
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
8) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the field in the ‘Comment’ Box. If desired, use the FMS Knobs or keypad
to change the comment (limited to 25 characters).
9) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key. If the map pointer is within the boundaries of an airspace, a menu pops. Use the FMS Knob
to highlight ‘Create User Waypoint’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page is displayed
with the captured position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter the waypoint name. Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint name.
By default, the new waypoint is created as a Route waypoint type using the RAD/DIS mode of reference.
4) Setting the Waypoint Type:
If the waypoint will be a ‘Route’ waypoint, press the ENT Key.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) If the waypoint will be an ‘Airport’ waypoint, turn the FMS Knobs to highlight ‘Airport’ press the ENT Key.
Press the ENT Key again to close the popup window regarding valid elevation.
b) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter the airport elevation and press the ENT Key.
5) With the ‘Temporary’ Field highlighted, press the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box to change the storage
method to temporary or normal, as desired.
AFCS
6) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Waypoint Mode’ Field. If desired, change the waypoint mode of
reference in one of the following ways:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
Or:
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
APPENDICES
Or:
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs or keypad.
INDEX
7) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the field in the ‘Comment’ Box. If desired, use the FMS Knobs or keypad
to change the comment (limited to 25 characters).
8) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page displayed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) With the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page displayed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, or use the FMS Knobs or
keypad to enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
3) Press the MENU Key. Use the FMS Knobs to highlight ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
APPENDICES
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPT – User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knobs to highlight ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
194
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B, TMA, and Airways surrounding TMA, Class
C, CTA, Class A, Class D, Restricted (Prohibited), MOA (Military), and other airspace provided by the navigation
database. Some examples of typical airspaces are depicted below. See the Map Symbols portion of this section for
the maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area. Temporary Flight
Restrictions (TFRs) are discussed in the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Class C Airspace
Alert Area
(Other)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspace Altitude
Label
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class D Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MOA (Military)
APPENDICES
ADIZ
(Other)
Warning Area
(Other)
INDEX
Figure 5-36 Airspaces
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
NEAREST AIRSPACE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SETTING AIRSPACE ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box (‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the controlled/
special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the ‘NRST – Nearest
Airspaces’ Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page. It simply turns
on/off the message provided in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
Pressing the PFD Messages Softkey displays the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts
may be displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
AFCS
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Enabling/disabling airspace alerts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
APPENDICES
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
196
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knobs or keypad to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VIEWING NEAREST AIRSPACE INFORMATION
EIS
The ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’ Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In
addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’
Page. In addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the ‘NRST – Nearest
Airspaces’ Page displays airspace information in four boxes labelled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’,
‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The map on the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’ Page automatically zooms in on the nearest airspace as listed in
the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box and an information window about that airspace is shown on the map. Use the FMS
Knob to select and view other nearest airspaces on the map. If there are no nearest airspaces listed, the map
will be centered around the aircraft present position.
Airspace 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’
Page. The Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled
only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Airspace Alerts Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Nearest Airspace
Information
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
AFCS
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Airspace 3
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airspaces Page
APPENDICES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey on the MFD; or push the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts
Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airspace.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SMART AIRSPACE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The
function does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the
airspace. If the current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace
boundary is shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of
the airspace, the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Smart Airspace function will not de-emphasize airspaces on the HSI Map when the MFD is in reversionary mode.
Smart Airspace Off
Figure 5-38 Smart Airspace
Smart Airspace On
Turning smart airspace on or off:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The ’Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
198
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on the PFD, or the PFD/MFD Controller,
is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
NOTE: When flying Direct-to the Final Approach Fix (FAF), the system will suspend (SUSP) leg sequencing if
the approach intercept angle exceeds 45 degrees.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The ‘Direct To’ Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
– Identifier/Symbol/
Region
– Facility Name
– City
VNV Constraints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Altitude at Arrival
– Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
AFCS
Location of Destination
– Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-39 ‘Direct To’ Window – MFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– Identifier/Symbol/City
– Facility Name
VNV Constraints
Altitude at Arrival –
Along Track Offset –
Direct-to Point Info
– Bearing/Distance
– Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-40 ‘Direct To’ Window – PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window. Also, any waypoint
contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’ Window, the ‘FPL –
Active Flight Plan’ Page, or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window.
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD “Flight Plan” or
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into
the flight plan.
Waypoint Submenu
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
Figure 5-41 Waypoint Submenu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ‘Direct To’ Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active
flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field on the ‘Direct To’ Window.
200
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu – press the CLR Key to remove it), or use the keypad to begin entering a
waypoint identifier, or turn the large FMS Knob to select the facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS
Knob or use the keypad to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility
or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint submenu window with a list of flight plan
waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the ¯ Key.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the default
selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint submenu window.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
EIS
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST – Nearest Airports‘ Page for
the MFD and push the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ¯ Key.
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field.
3) Use the small FMS Knob or keypad to enter the desired course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page. If no
airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is
automatically created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
APPENDICES
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to destination.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
202
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a vertical path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude constraint of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the
waypoint, or at the specified distance along the flight path if VNV offset distance has been entered. Direct-to
vertical navigation is discussed in the Vertical Navigation portion of Flight Management. Offset distances (along
track offsets) are discussed in the Flight Planning portion of Flight Management.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A Roll Steering Path is displayed for: transitions between two disconnected legs (i.e. holding), some procedure turn
segments, parallel track segments, or transitions after some fly-over waypoints (discussed later in this section).
‡ A Roll Steering Path that is beyond the next leg will appear as a Future Roll Steering Path. When a Future Roll Steering Path
becomes the next leg, it appears as a Roll Steering Path.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
APPENDICES
One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is overwritten
when another flight plan is activated. A standby flight plan can be created by copying the active flight plan or by
manual entry. The standby flight plan can be activated. A flight plan can also be created and stored in the system
memory. Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory.
Upon power up, the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position
is at the origin airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not within 5 nm of the airport
origin, on the ground, or if more than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the
previously active flight plan is not retained.
INDEX
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
204
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure, or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically
updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is
no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see
Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
EIS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
SELECTION AND MODIFICATION METHODS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are four methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ‘FPL – ‘Standby Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD (create/modify the standby flight plan)
• ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
AFCS
To create or modify a flight plan, the cursor can be used to edit the required fields within the flight plan and
the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box within the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page. The cursor will appear as a blinking
field consisting of a solid cyan or magenta rectangle. The cursor can be activated by pushing the FMS Knob.
Fields can be highlighted by turning the large FMS Knob, and edits can be accomplished within the field by
combining small and large FMS Knob turns or utilizing the alphanumeric keypad on the PFD/MFD Controller.
Active FPL Waypoint List
Cursor
APPENDICES
Insertion Point
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Required
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-42 ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on MFD
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-43 ‘Active Flight Plan’ Window on PFD
Standby FPL Waypoint List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Comment
– Procedure Header
– Waypoint Identifier
– Airway Identifier
– Desired Track to Waypoint
– Distance to Waypoint
– Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby Flight
Plan Map
AFCS
Figure 5-44 ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page
Catalog Contents
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
– # Used
– # Empty
Flight Plan List
APPENDICES
– Comment
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
INDEX
– Departure Waypoint
– Destination Waypoint
– Total Flight Plan Distance
– Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-45 ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page
206
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Withn the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, the pilot can use the Quick Select Box instead of the
cursor for the same functions. When the cursor is removed, the Quick Select Box will take its place. The Quick
Select Box will appear as an open dashed cyan rectangle surrounding a field. Moving the Joystick left, right,
up, or down will move the Quick Select Box to the desired field or location in order to add, modify, or remove
data. Edits can be accomplished by combining small and large FMS Knob turns within a field or utilizing the
alphanumeric keypad on the PFD/MFD Controller. When returning to the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page from
another page, the Quick Select Box will move to most relevant location in the flight plan with respect to the
aircraft’s location.
EIS
The Insertion Point Indicator is displayed as a small cyan triangle and is associated with both the Cursor and
the Quick Select Box location. The purpose of the Insertion Point Indicator is to show where new data entry
information will be placed within the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Quick Select Box
Insertion Point Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
KTOP added where
Insertion Point
Indicator was
previously located
(see previous figure)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-46 Insertion Point Indicator and Quick Select Box
Airway begins later
since KTOP is not a
part of the airway.
Figure 5-47 KTOP added at Insertion Point
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN DISPLAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight plan information can be displayed in different locations and formats. Standby flight plan information
is only displayed on the ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page. Active flight plan information can be displayed on
the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page by enabling the Flight Plan Progress inset. Profile information for the active
flight plan may also be displayed; see the Vertical Situation Display portion of Flight Management for more
information. Active flight plan creation and modifications can be made on the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page.
The MFD Split Screen feature allows a side by side display of the active flight plan and corresponding chart.
APPENDICES
FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS INSET
Active flight plan progress can be displayed on the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
NOTE: ETE can be displayed as either HH+MM (ETE greater than 60 minutes) or MM:SS (ETE less than 60
minutes).
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the active flight plan progress on the navigation map:
1) Select the ‘Map – Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the FPL PROG Softkey to display the active flight plan progress.
5) To remove the active flight plan progress from the navigation map, press the Off Softkey.
EIS
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page and ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page can be configured to show
cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan, and it can
be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is displayed: Fuel Remaining
(‘Fuel REM’), Estimated Time Enroute (‘ETE’), Estimated Time of Arrival (‘ETA’), and Bearing to the waypoint
(‘BRG’).
Changing the flight plan view:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page or the ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or press the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level flight plan softkeys.
SPLIT SCREEN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Charts may be viewed alongside the active flight plan in Split Screen mode. Pressing the Charts Softkey
from the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page will remove the active flight plan map to display a Charts Pane
alongside the Active Flight Plan Pane. The active flight plan map can be re-displayed. However, displaying
the map in split screen limits the flight plan content which can be displayed. For example, displaying the
Flight Plan Map while in split screen narrow view removes the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box. See the following
figures depicting the different split screen displays with the active flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
See the System Overview Section for more information regarding Split Screen Mode. For more information
on Charts, see the Additional Features Section.
208
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Pane is the active display pane
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Split Screen Wide View
Split Screen Narrow View
Figure 5-48 Split Screen Mode Narrow and Wide View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Split Screen Wide View with Flight Plan Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Split Screen Narrow View with Flight Plan Map
Figure 5-49 Split Screen Mode with Flight Plan Map
Enabling/Disabling split screen mode from the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable
full screen mode. Split screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted
by a dark purple border indicating it is the active pane.
INDEX
3) To quickly view the chart corresponding to the active flight plan leg, press the Sync Softkey.
4) Press the Charts Softkey again to disable split screen mode.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying the flight plan map on the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Charts Softkey. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable
full screen mode. Split screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted
by a dark purple border indicating it is the active pane.
3) Use the Joystick to select the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane as the active pane.
4) Press the MENU Key. ‘Show Flight Plan Map’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) To remove the Flight Plan Map, press the MENU Key and select ‘Hide Flight Plan Map’. Press the ENT Key.
Changing the flight plan map orientation in split screen mode:
1) If necessary, use the Joystick to select the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Pane as the active display pane.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key. Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘FPL Map Orientation to (Track Up, HDG Up, North Up)’.
3) Press the ENT Key to select the orientation setting and return to the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Pane.
4) Repeat steps 2 through 3 to cycle through the different orientation settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The active flight plan is listed on the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, and in the ‘Flight Plan’
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on
the navigation maps. A standby flight plan may be created on the ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page. A standby
flight plan may activated or stored. If the standby flight plan is not stored, it will be erased upon the next power
cycle. Stored flight plans are listed on the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, and are available for activation
(becomes the active flight plan).
AFCS
Auto-designation will determine the most likely airport of origin and auto-populate the Active Flight Plan.
Once determined, the airfield identifier automatically appears in the ‘Origin’ Field and the line immediately
below ‘Origin’ while keeping the runway (‘RW’) Field empty. The line below the Origin line serves as the first
point in the flight plan.
Auto-designation occurs between 15 and 60 seconds after display power-up under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Aircraft position is known
• Aircraft is on the ground
• Nearest airport is within 200NM
APPENDICES
If the pilot manually enters the origin, or any other leg of the flight plan before auto-designation occurs,
nothing gets inserted automatically. The automatic insertion logic only runs once, so the pilot can edit the
origin if the nearest airport is not the desired origin.
INDEX
• Flight plan is empty
Both the Origin airport/runway and the first point of the flight plan will be the same unless a departure is
entered and a manual leg is inserted at the beginning of the loaded departure. Loading a departure locks in the
origin information.
If the pilot enters a different airport into the first point of the flight plan, the Origin will change to this entry,
and the pilot will be prompted to enter the departure runway.
210
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD ‘Flight Plan’ Window, ‘Recent’
submenu, or the MFD ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into the flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following procedure is intended to provide an overview of basic flight plan creation. It will create a flight
plan from the origin runway to the destination runway, and includes enroute waypoint selection. The following
procedure does not include airways or terminal procedures. For instructions on how to add airways to a flight
plan, see the Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications discussion later in this Flight Planning Section.
For information on departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches see the Procedures Section.
Creating an active, standby, or stored flight plan:
EIS
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
b) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key
to display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) If the system auto-designated the Origin, proceed to Step 3.
Or:
Enter or modify the origin airport and runway as follows:
a) Select the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier.
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the airport.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Select the destination airport and runway by highlighting the field below the Destination header and completing
steps 2b – 2e.
APPENDICES
4) Select the enroute waypoints:
a) Select the location to insert the waypoint.
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the waypoint.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key. The flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, push the FMS Knob to remove to deactivate the cursor, if necessary.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT AND AIRWAY MODIFICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active and stored flight plans can be edited at any time. Waypoints and airways can be added, modified, or
removed from any flight plan. Edits made to an active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered.
Modifications to flight planned departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches are discussed later in
the Procedures portion of Flight Management.
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS
EIS
Waypoints can be added to any flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the desired point of insertion,
enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are limited to 100 waypoints
(including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in the flight plan exceeds
100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s) are
not added to the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Adding Waypoints
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window has duplicates, a ‘Duplicate Waypoint’
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the flight plan is successfully edited in the ‘Flight Plan’ Window from PFD while the MFD ‘FPL –
AFCS
Active Flight Plan’ Page is in the process of being edited, the ‘Flight Plan Modified By Other User’ message
will appear on the MFD. Press the ENT key to return to the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page with the accepted
changes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Origin Header
Enroute Header
APPENDICES
Enroute Waypoints
INDEX
Destination Header
Figure 5-50 Active Flight Plan Waypoints
212
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to the flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
EIS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the location to insert the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating and adding user waypoints to the flight plan using the map pointer on the MFD:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
AFCS
For a standby flight plan, press the FPL. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page
and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the FPL Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and push the
FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
APPENDICES
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the location to insert the waypoint.
3) Push the Joystick for the MFD to activate the panning function on the flight plan map and pan to the location
of the desired user waypoint.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
4) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of MAPxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the flight plan.
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Individual waypoints can be removed from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final approach segment
(such as the FAF or MAP) can not be removed individually. Attempting to remove a waypoint that is not
allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
EIS
Removing an individual waypoint from the flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the waypoint to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if necessary.
Fly-Over Waypoint Designation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as either fly-by or fly-over
waypoints. A fly-by waypoint is a waypoint that marks the intersection of two straight paths, with the
transition from one path to another being made by the aircraft using a precisely calculated turn that “flies
by” but does not vertically cross the waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A fly-over waypoint is a waypoint that must be crossed vertically by the aircraft. If the system determines
that the flight plan leg geometry cannot support fly-by navigation for a waypoint sequence in the current
flight plan, it will change a fly-by waypoint to a fly-over waypoint automatically. A roll steering path or
future roll steering path may be displayed after the fly-over waypoint until the roll steering path aligns with
the course leg connecting the fly-over waypoint and the following waypoint in the flight plan. This system
generated fly-over waypoint will not display the fly-over symbol.
214
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fly-Over Waypoint
- No fly-over symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Steering to next leg
- Roll Steering until path aligns
with course leg (PNH to ILOZA)
EIS
Figure 5-51 PNH Fly-Over Waypoint
Active Leg to PNH
- Geometry cannot support fly-by
to the following leg (PNH to ILOZA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A fly-over waypoint may also be manually designated by the pilot, in which case, the fly-over waypoint
symbol is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enroute Segment
– TOP as Fly-By Waypoint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-52 TOP Fly-By Waypoint
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
EIS
Enroute Segment
– TOP designated as
Fly-Over Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-53 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
Designating a fly-over waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
AFCS
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the location to insert the waypoint.
APPENDICES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-Over Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a
fly-over waypoint?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) To change the waypoint back to a fly-by waypoint, highlight the desired waypoint. Press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Set Fly-By Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a fly-by waypoint?’ Window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
216
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN AIRWAYS
Within flight plans, airways can be added, removed and collapsed/expanded.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adding Airways
Airways can be added to any flight plan. An airway can only be added if there is an existing entry
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach
procedure. The system anticipates the desired airway based on the selected waypoint and the flight plan.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Airways Available
at TOP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-54 Select Airway Page – Selecting Airway
Airway Entry Waypoint
AFCS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Airway Exit Points
Available
APPENDICES
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-55 Select Airway Page – Selecting Exit Point
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding an airway to the flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
EIS
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the location to insert the waypoint. If there is no valid airway entry waypoint in the flight plan, one must
be entered first.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob for the MFD one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU
Key for the and select “Load Airway”(PFD or MFD). The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu item is
available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has already been entered in the flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways
are shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
AFCS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a
directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
218
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing Airways
Removing an entire airway from the flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the header of the airway to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if necessary.
Collapsing Airways
The system allows airways in the flight plan to be collapsed or expanded. When airways have been
collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
AFCS
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value
is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The flight plan will always keep the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To” waypoint,
and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed airway
segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically expanded.
When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
219
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
J25.CWK Airway
Expanded View
EIS
Airway Collapsed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-56 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AFCS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
220
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section will discuss activating a flight plan leg, utilizing the standby flight plan, and conducting enroute
operations such as creating a parallel track, along track offset, or user defined hold. For information on
departures, arrivals, and approaches refer to the Procedures Section later in the Flight Management Section.
In-flight, the system automatically sequences through the active flight plan, with the exception of manually
terminated legs (such as FM, HM, or VM) that can occur within procedures (refer to the Procedures Section later
in the Flight Management Section).
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
EIS
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active leg’.
The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
2) Select the end waypoint for the desired leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor, if necessary.
UTILIZING THE STANDBY FLIGHT PLAN
A standby flight plan may be created manually on the ‘Standby Flight Plan’ Page or by copying the active
flight plan. The standby flight plan is available for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
AFCS
Viewing the active and standby flight plan:
For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. The active flight plan may be viewed on either the PFD or the MFD.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Copy the active flight plan to the standby flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Menu Key. Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Copy to Standby Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key. If a standby flight plan already exists, the message ‘Copy to Standby Flight Plan and Replace
Current Standby Flight Plan?’ is displayed. Press the ENT Key to continue. The ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page
is displayed showing the copied flight plan.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the Menu Key. Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Copy from Active Flight Plan’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. If a standby flight plan already exists, the message ‘Copy from Active Flight Plan and Replace
Current Standby Flight Plan?’ is displayed. Press the ENT Key to continue.
NOTE: The ‘Copy to Standby Flight Plan’ function is best utilized from the MFD. Selecting the ‘Copy to
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Standby Flight Plan’ menu option on the PFD displays the standby flight plan in the ‘Flight Plan’ Window
instead of the active flight plan. Pressing the FPL Key on the PFD re-displays the active flight plan in the
‘Flight Plan’ Window.
Figure 5-57 ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page
APPENDICES
Activating the standby flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Activate Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
Press the Menu Key. Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key.
3) If an active flight plan already exists, the message ‘Activate standby flight plan and replace current active route?’
is displayed. Press the ENT Key to continue. The ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page is displayed showing the copied
flight plan.
222
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The standby flight plan may also be used for diversion planning purposes by linking the standby flight plan to the
aircraft’s present position. Once linked, or “joined”, a ‘P. POS’ reference will be added to the standby flight plan and
the standby flight plan map will depict a white line between the aircraft present position and the standby flight plan
waypoint for which it is currently linked to.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: ‘Join from Present Position’ is for planning purposes only. It does not create any changes to the active
flight plan, nor does it provide navigation guidance to the selected waypoint in the standby flight plan.
Linking aircraft present position (‘Join from Present Position’) to the standby flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
EIS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint
for linking the aircraft present position to.
3) Press the Menu Key. Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Join From Present Position’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The ‘P. POS’ reference is added to the standby flight plan prior to the linked waypoint. To
change the waypoint that P. POS is linked to, repeat steps 2-4 for the desired waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Standby Flight Plan Map
Aircraft present position
White line indicates
link from P. POS to
TYTUS
P. POS reference in
standby flight plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-58 ‘FPL – Standby Flight Plan’ Page – Join From P.POS link active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing P. POS link from the standby flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘P. POS’ reference.
3) Press the CLR Key. The message, ‘Remove Link?’ is displayed. Press the ENT Key to remove the link from the
standby flight plan.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight
plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the
system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances
can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm.
EIS
Offset distance is calculated as a radial distance from the reference waypoint rather than a direct distance.
The system will place the offset waypoint in the flight plan leg for which the radial distance intersects,
regardless of distance between preceding flight plan legs. If the system is unable to determine a point for
which the radial offset distance intersects the flight path, the message ‘Unable to place <offset waypoint and
distance> on the existing Flight Plan’ will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted before the selected
waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted after
the selected waypoint. Offset waypoints can span multiple flight plan legs, and multiple offset waypoints are
allowed on each leg.
NOTE: If an along track waypoint is created prior to a direct to waypoint and both waypoints are modified
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
to be a fly over waypoint, the along track waypoint will be removed from the navigation map. It will remain
in the flight plan. If it’s desired to have the along track, fly over waypoint depicted on the navigation map,
recreate the along track waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system limits the along track offset distance such that the along-track offset falls between the first and
last waypoints in the flight plan. Assigning an along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not
permitted. An along track offset is not allowed between the final approach fix and missed approach point of
an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be changed,
the existing along track offset waypoint must be removed and a new one created with the new offset distance.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Altitude constraints can also be entered for the along track waypoint, and are modifiable. An along track
offset waypoint can also be used for lateral navigation, such as the creation of a user-defined hold or a directto destination.
224
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-59 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of ±1 to 999 nm (offset must fall between the first and
last waypoint within the flight plan).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor, if necessary.
Removing an along track offset distance:
APPENDICES
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the along track offset.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove VNAV along-track waypoint’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the altitude field (‘VNV’ or ‘ALT’).
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) The cursor is now flashing in offset distance field.
EIS
6) Enter the desired along-track distance.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing an altitude constraint from an along track offset:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the altitude constraint for along track offset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ Window is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
226
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
EIS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint
at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current
flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier. Activation of parallel track will
apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not meet the criteria for parallel
track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning of that leg.
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled.
EIS
The following will inhibit activation of a parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to, to the selected waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with
the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’.
• If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of
more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because
of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status indicates that
the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the active leg type
(‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. The following
will cancel the parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to, to a waypoint.
• Initiating a hold at the present position.
• If a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• No legs are remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. Initiating a hold at
a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly to the hold
waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be resumed.
Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
INDEX
APPENDICES
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
228
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Parallel Track
Waypoints
– TIFTO-p
– TOP-p
– ...
– LAA-p
Original Track
EIS
Parallel Track
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-60 Parallel Track Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the keypad to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate
Parallel Track’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
AFCS
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A holding pattern can be defined at any flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a directto waypoint.
EIS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(Right or Left)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-61 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
230
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
Hold Course
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint selection
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-62 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at a flight plan waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
EIS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the waypoint for the hold.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
232
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a ¯ Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, then select ‘Hold?’ when finished.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined at
the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, ‘HOLD’ is inserted into the active
flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold from the flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
AFCS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Highlight the ‘HOLD’ in the flight plan.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the flight plan. Select ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MANAGING FLIGHT PLANS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot can manage flight plans by importing/exporting via SD Card or via (Flight Stream 510) Wireless
Transceiver (if installed), and by storing, copying, inverting, and deleting. Also, the comment field (name) of
each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification and sorting.
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
EIS
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Wireless Transceiver (if installed). Transfer
of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device. When a mobile device is attempting to
transfer a flight plan to the system, the pending flight plan may be ignored, previewed, stored, or activated
by the pilot.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pending Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Delete Softkey
Store Softkey
Activate Softkey
AFCS
Figure 5-63 Preview Flight Plan Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
APPENDICES
Pending Flight Plan
INDEX
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
Figure 5-64 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
234
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Ignoring a pending flight plan transferred from a mobile device:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan
will still be available on the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
EIS
Previewing a pending flight plan transferred from a mobile device:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL – Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL – Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL – Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Storing a pending flight plan transferred from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL – Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
a) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a pending flight plan transferred from a mobile device:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL – Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
1) Press the FPL Key.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
AFCS
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
236
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6)
EIS
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Alternatively, flight plans may be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the ‘FPL –
Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
APPENDICES
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or Cancel” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “Cancel” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Exporting a flight plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
EIS
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs or keypad to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or exported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No
stored flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
AFCS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
APPENDICES
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
INDEX
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
Table 5-9 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
238
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INVERTING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
A flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point. Inverting and
activating stored flight plans is discussed within the Stored Flight Plan Functions portion of this section.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
3) Highlight ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’
and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DELETING THE ACTIVE OR STANDBY FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned off, overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. Additionally, the system allows the pilot to delete the active and standby flight plan. Deleting the
active flight plan suspends navigation by the system.
Deleting the active or standby flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
STORED FLIGHT PLAN FUNCTIONS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. Details about each stored flight plan
can be viewed on the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and on the ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a new
flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to
duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Stored Flight Plan Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– Memory Slot
– Comment
– Procedure Identifier
– Waypoint Identifier
– Airway Identifier
– Desired Track to Waypoint
– Distance to Waypoint
– Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Figure 5-65 Stored Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) Information is displayed in the ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute
safe altitude information for the selected flight plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
AFCS
6) Push the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
Storing an active flight plan or a standby flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Menu Key. Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
240
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Copying a stored flight plan to another flight plan memory slot, on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan #?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
CHANGING A FLIGHT PLAN COMMENT (NAME)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the flight plan comment:
1) For the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required if using the Quick Select
Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AFCS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the comment field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Use the FMS Knobs or alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Controller to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor, if necessary.
242
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical navigation is available when valid VNV data is entered in the flight plan, and the ENBL VNV Softkey is
pressed (softkey label will change to ‘CNCL VNV’ once enabled) on the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV ¯ Softkey on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan
waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD)
point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AFCS
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
APPENDICES
3) To disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Disabled (fields dashed)
CNCL VNV Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-66 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
CONSTRAINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Initiating the VNV direct-to function to the FAF, manually specifying an FPA to the FAF, or manually
creating an altitude constraint at the FAF will disrupt the VNV function from creating a lateral offset. Thus,
the baro-VNV path may not intersect the approach descent path.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
AFCS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Constraint
Examples
System Calculated
Advisory Altitude (White Text)
APPENDICES
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Modified Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
INDEX
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
Cross AT or
BETWEEN 5,000 ft
and 7,000 ft
244
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-67 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
Cyan Text
5OOOFT
The system cannot use this altitude in determining vertical
guidance because of an invalid constraint condition.
EIS
Altitude(s) retrieved from the navigation database. White
line(s) above and/or below indicate the type of constraint as
shown in the preceding figure. These altitudes are provided
as a reference, and are not designated for vertical guidance.
Altitude is designated for vertical guidance. Cyan line(s)
above and/or below indicate the type of constraint as shown
in the preceding figure. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manually modified data entry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Advisory altitude calculated by the system estimating the
altitude of the aircraft as it passes over the navigation point.
5OOOFT
Table 5-10 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When a procedure is loaded, the system will auto-designate (automatically enter and enable) altitude
constraints to be used for vertical guidance. An altitude constraint which has been auto-designated by the
system will be displayed as cyan text.
An altitude constraint may be manually designated only if it is available for vertical guidance. Altitudes that
are not available for vertical guidance are shown in white text and cannot be selected by the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is available for vertical guidance, the FAF altitude constraint may be
modified and set above or below the published FAF altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For all designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate advisory altitudes prior to the designated
altitude constraint. These advisory altitudes are not auto-designated and are displayed as white text.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated”. Pressing the
CLR Key with the altitude constraint highlighted in the active flight plan removes the altitude constraint
designation. The altitude will not be used for vertical guidance and the text displayed will be shown in
white. The system will recalculate advisory altitudes (white text) when any altitude constraint is designated,
modified, or un-designated.
AFCS
An altitude constraint may be entered as a flight level (FL), height above mean sea level (MSL), or height
above ground level (AGL). AGL format is only available for airport waypoints.
A designated altitude constraint may be rendered invalid if any of the following are true:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• The descent constraints are not sequentially descending.
APPENDICES
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. If an altitude
constraint is removed and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint, the
system will display that altitude restriction in white text. The system also provides a way to revert a published
altitude constraint that has been modified.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering or modifying an altitude constraint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Select the desired waypoint altitude constraint field.
1) Press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required if using the Quick Select
Box, and not required on PFD).
3) Edit the constraint using the FMS Knobs or alphanumeric keypad:
a) Select the ‘Type’ Field and choose ‘AT’, ‘ABOVE’, ‘BELOW’, or ‘BETWEEN’ as the type of constraint and press
the ENT Key to accept, the ‘ALT’ Field is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
b) Enter the desired altitude(s) and press the ENT Key. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small FMS
Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and
enter the three digit flight level. To enter altitudes as a flight level using the keypad, enter ‘F’ as the first
character.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the constraint Type and Altitude. If the selected waypoint is an airport without a
runway selected, an additional choice is displayed when entering QNH altitudes. Turn the small FMS Knob to
choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude. For AGL altitudes, a popup window will appear,
requesting the confirmation of an AGL to MSL altitude value conversion. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint.
Removing/undesignating an altitude constraint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required if using the Quick Select
Box, and not required on PFD).
2) Select the desired waypoint altitude constraint (‘ALT’).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required if using the Quick Select
Box, and not required on PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Select ‘Revert’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
246
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED AND FLIGHT PATH ANGLE CONSTRAINTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (‘VS TGT’) and/or
flight path angle (‘FPA’) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs or use the alphanumeric keypad as needed to edit the values.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying the default FPA:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob and Setup 2 Softkey to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘DEFAULT FPA’ Field in the ‘VNV’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to set the desired flight path angle.
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the ‘Map - Navigation Map Page. The
terrain, obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan
information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and
destination runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance
Section for information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
AFCS
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
APPENDICES
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the Navigation Map).
See the Hazard Avoidance Section for symbol information and display of point obstacles on the Navigation Map.
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The numeric constraint values are displayed below the waypoint label, using the same color and format as
on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page. Database derived altitude restrictions are shown in white. Any altitude
constraint that has been designated for use in vertical navigation is shown in cyan. The following table shows
the numeric representation and the graphical representation of the constraints. The tip of each constraint
symbol triangle is placed at the corresponding constraint barometric altitude.
Constraint Type
Numeric Representation
AT
3OOOFT
AT or ABOVE
5OOOFT
AT or BELOW
3OOOFT
AT or BETWEEN
5OOOFT
3OOOFT
Altitude Constraint Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-11 Altitude Constraint Icons
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNV descents because the lateral distance of
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNV profile for any legs that have no vertical path guidance.
Active FPL Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VSD Mode (FPL)
Selected Alt. (10,000ft)
Altitude Constraints
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
Current VNAV Profile
Obstacle
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-68 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
248
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUTO FPL
AUTO TRK
Items available on VSD
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information*
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto
FPL Criteria
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VSD Mode Displayed
Button
Mode
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information*
Flight Plan
FPL
Active FPL not available
Only shows message ‘Flight Plan Not Available’
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
Track
TRK
N/A
selected altitude
* Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and
destination runway
Active FPL available
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-12 VSD Modes
VSD MESSAGES
Message
‘Loading…’
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off
course and active leg over 200 NM’
‘VSD Not Available’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
‘VSD Data Old,. Deselect and Reselect VSD’
AFCS
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
Description
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
– Flight Plan mode is selected
– The active leg is greater than 200 nm
– The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
– Valid terrain database not available
– GPS MSL altitude not available
– Current barometric altitude not available
– Neither current track nor current heading available
– GPS position not available
– Map range setting is less than 1 nm
VSD data has failed to update for 2 seconds or more.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Table 5-13 VSD System Messages
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Approach, Departure
Terminal
En Route, Oceanic
Width of Swath
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
Table 5-14 VSD Width of Swath
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the VSD mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Inset Softkey.
6) Press the VSD mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the Off Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
250
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION DIRECT TO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV ¯ Softkey on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’
Page allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV
direct-to waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan
from current position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A
direct-to with altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would
bypass flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A
top of descent (TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD
is reached. All VNV altitudes prior to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon
successful activation of a direct-to destination that is part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following
the direct-to waypoint are retained.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required if using the Quick Select
Box, and not required on PFD).
2) Select the desired waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used, not
to include ‘BETWEEN’ altitude constraints. If not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated
altitude constraint is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the VNV ¯ Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV ¯’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Activate
vertical ¯ to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if necessary.
Removing a VNV direct-to altitude constraint:
AFCS
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded into the
active flight plan using the Procedures (PROC) Key.
NOTE: The charts database may contain Special Procedures. Prior to flying these procedures, pilots must
EIS
have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the corresponding current, and legitimatelysourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special Procedure in the charts database DOES NOT
imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
NOTE: Some airports may have published instrument approach procedures not contained within the navigation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
database. These procedures may be available for preview from the charts database, but are not available for
navigation guidance. See the Additional Features Section for more information on previewing Charts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the Procedure Loading Window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6,368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight
plan displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
INDEX
Figure 5-69 Procedure Leg Identifiers
252
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or:
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or:
EIS
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) To select another airport, Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the flight plan, the
new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
Figure 5-70 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Departure
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-71 Departure Loading
254
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT – Departure Information’ Page:
1) From the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group), press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT –
Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT – Airport information’ Page.
2) To select another airport, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Loading a departure procedure into a standby flight plan or a stored flight plan:
1) For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
– Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
4) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
Removing a departure procedure from the active, standby, or stored flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
Or:
AFCS
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Or:
256
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
EIS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the departure header in the flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if necessary.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded for any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Arrival Preview
Figure 5-72 Arrival Selection
Loaded Arrival
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-73 Arrival Loading
258
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT – Arrival Information’ Page:
1) From the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group), press the STAR Softkey.
The ‘WPT – Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT – Airport
Information’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an arrival procedure into the standby flight plan or stored flight plan:
1) F or the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Arrival’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC –
Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
Removing an arrival from the active, standby, or stored flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not
required if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
AFCS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
260
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key. If necessary, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required
if using the Quick Select Box, and not required on PFD).
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if necessary.
APPROACHES
INSTRUMENT APPROACH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is
already in the flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection
of an approach and the transition waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
APPENDICES
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart below. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath to the runway. This guidance is displayed on the system PFD in
the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS may be used as an alternate means of lateral navigation with or without vertical guidance for VOR and
NDB approaches, even when SBAS is unavailable. This also includes the final approach segment, as long as
the primary NAVAID (VOR or NDB) is monitored. When using GPS vertical guidance for VOR and NDB
approaches, a ‘+V’ will be displayed on the approach selection page after the selected VOR or NDB name (i.e.
NDB 13 +V). If a VOR or NDB is a circling only approach, GPS lateral guidance may still be used, but the ‘+V’
will not be associated with the approach name. This makes VOR and NDB approaches consistent with other
approaches that use GPS by giving them an approach “service level” of LNAV or LNAV+V.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitudes for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
EIS
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
Example on HSI
LNAV
GPS approach using LNAV, VOR, or NDB MDA. Available only if
GPS available. If GPS unavailable, abort.
LNAV+V
GPS approach using LNAV, VOR, or NDB MDA with advisory
vertical guidance. Available only if GPS available. If GPS
unavailable, abort.
L/VNAV
GPS approach using LNAV/VNAV DA. Available with Baro/VNAV
or SBAS availability. If both SBAS and Baro/VNAV unavailable,
downgrades to published LNAV MDA.
LP
GPS approach using LP MDA. Available only if SBAS available. If
SBAS unavailable, downgrades to published LNAV MDA.
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
LP+V
GPS approach using LP MDA with advisory vertical guidance.
Available only if SBAS available. If SBAS unavailable,
downgrades to published LNAV MDA.
LPV
GPS approach using LPV DA. Available only if SBAS available.
If SBAS unavailable, downgrades to L/VNAV published DA if
Baro/VNAV available. Without Baro-VNAV or if after the FAF,
downgrades to published LNAV MDA.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-15 Approach Service Levels and Downgrades
262
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Selected Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-74 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Load or Activate? Annunciation
APPENDICES
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VISUAL APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a visual approach feature. Unlike instrument approaches, visual approaches are not
defined in the navigation database and do not follow a precise prescribed path. Instead, the system calculates
the lateral and vertical path for the chosen runway and creates visual approach waypoints based on runway
position and course as specified in the navigation database.
NOTE: The charts database may contain Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFPs) for certain airports. CVFPs
EIS
follow a precise prescribed path and are classified as Instrument Approach Procedures (IAPs). See the Additional
Features Section for more information on Charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Each visual approach will have two transitions, the straight in transition (STRAIGHT) and the Vectors-toFinal transition (VECTORS). The visual approach waypoints (fixes) consist of the initial fix (STRGHT), the
final approach fix (FINAL), and the missed approach point (RWxx). A 3 degree glide path is calculated from
the missed approach point up to each waypoint along the extended straight-in path.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For visual approaches, the pilot is responsible for avoiding terrain, obstacles and traffic. Therefore, when
a visual approach is selected, the message “Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches” is
displayed on the approach selection page and must be acknowledged before the visual approach is loaded
into the flight plan.
INDEX
Figure 5-76 Loading Visual Approach
264
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH SELECTION AND REMOVAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either ‘Load’ or ‘Activate’ is given (‘Activate’ is only available
for the active flight plan). ‘Load’ adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it
for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight
plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ also adds the procedure
to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to load the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To – Final’ —
which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
EIS
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a destination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the
end of the enroute segment.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the ‘Approach Channel’ Field.
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob or keypad to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the
approach channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
EIS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate?’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ Field is highlighted.
Loading an approach procedure into a standby flight plan or a stored flight plan:
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
1) For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
AFCS
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
2) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
– Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
266
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach ‘Channel’ Field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Use the FMS Knob or keypad to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the
approach channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures’ Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT Key.
3) From the ‘PROC – Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key for the MFD. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is
displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
When a visual approach is selected, the message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is
displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Select the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an approach from the active, standby, or stored flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
EIS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
For the standby flight plan, press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL –
Standby Flight Plan’ Page and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
AFCS
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL – Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and
push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL – Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
2) Select the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
268
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISSED APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system is capable of providing guidance for the approach as well as the missed approach. Once the
missed approach is activated, MAPR will be displayed on the HSI next to the CDI. If the missed approach is
activated prior to the Missed Approach Point (MAP), waypoint sequencing will continue along the approach
to the missed approach. If the missed approach is not activated prior to the MAP, the system will enter SUSP
Mode once the aircraft crosses the MAP until the missed approach is activated or SUSP Mode is disabled. See
the Flight Instruments, Course Deviation Indicator section for more information on SUSP Mode.
See the Using Map Displays, Map Symbols discussion previously given in this section for information on
displaying the missed approach preview on the navigation map.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Course to Altitude Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-77 Course to Altitude
APPENDICES
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of – 40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly., and the snowflake ( ) icon is displayed next to those altitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually inputting the temperature for compensation is explained in the following procedures. However,
the system already automatically accounts for temperatures warmer and colder than ISA by adjusting
the lateral position of the FAF altitude constraint (calculated by the Transition to Approach Temperature
Compensation feature). Once the flight plan waypoint prior to the FAF becomes the active VNV waypoint
(or the FAF becomes the active VNV waypoint in the case that the previous waypoint does not contain a valid
altitude constraint), a lateral offset distance is calculated for the FAF altitude constraint. Once calculated, the
VNV function seamlessly applies the offset such that a smooth vertical transition onto the approach descent
path occurs.
NOTE: Manually specifying temperature compensation for an approach will disrupt the system from
AFCS
automatically creating a lateral offset of the VNAV function in use.
NOTE: Initiating the VNAV direct-to function or manually specifying an FPA at the FAF will disrupt the VNAV
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
function from creating a lateral offset. Thus, temperature is not compensated for and the baro-VNAV path
and may not intersect the approach descent path.
270
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-78 Temperature Compensation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
AFCS
Figure 5-79 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Manually setting temperature compensated for approach altitudes:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, the ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed with the temperature highlighted.
5) Set the ‘Temperature at <airport>’ Field. The compensated altitude is computed as the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window on the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MFD, or in the ‘References’ Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments Section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cancelling temperature compensation setting for approach altitudes:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, the ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
272
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Temperature Compensation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-81 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering a temperature compensated minimum into an approach:
1) From the ‘FPL – Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’. Press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob and the ENT Key to select the desired approach and transition.
4) Use the FMS Knob to place the flashing cursor in the ‘Minimums’ Box. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
‘TEMP COMP’. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the keypad to enter the minimums altitude. Press the ENT Key. The cursor is
placed in the ‘TEMP AT <destination airport>’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the keypad to enter the temperature at the destination. Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to Load or Activate the approach. The approach is added to the active flight plan, and the
temperature compensated minimums are displayed on the PFD.
Approach
minimum
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Temperature at
destination
MFD – ‘PROC – Approach Loading’ Page
PFD – COMP MIN Shown
TEMP COMP
Minimum
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-82 Entering Temp Comp Minimums for an Approach
274
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 WEIGHT AND BALANCE PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page is available to manage actual weights, estimated weights, center of gravity
(CG), and fuel quantity throughout an entire flight.
The ‘Station vs Weight’ Box displays a visual representation of the aircraft’s center of gravity from takeoff to
landing for a given flight plan, plus the remaining fuel burn. The ‘Take Off’ CG icon is represented as a triangle,
‘Current’ CG as a diamond, ‘Landing’ CG as a square, and ‘Fuel Burn’ as a curved line. All that lie within the white
bordered polygon, are considered to be within the weight balance parameters and, therefore, are colored green.
EIS
Landing Longitudinal CG
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
Aircraft Load Entry
Aircraft Weight & Balance
Calculator
Current Longitudinal CG
Predicted CG Movement
due to Fuel Burn
Graph Softkey
Estimated Weight Calculator
Fuel Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Est. Landing Weight Calculation Est. Landing Fuel Calculation Fuel Reserves (volume/weight) Excess Fuel Calculation -
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Basic Empty Weight Zero Fuel Weight Calculation Fuel On Board (volume/weight) Ramp Weight Calculation Takeoff Weight Calculation Current Weight Calculation Longitudinal Station CG -
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Pilot Weight Entry
- Copilot Weight Entry
- TKS Fluid Weight Entry (optional)
- Passenger Middle Weight Entry
- Passenger Left Weight Entry
- Passenger Right Weight Entry
- Baggage Weight Entry
Confirm Softkey
Figure 5-83 Weight & Balance Page
Pressing the Graph Softkey reveals a Zoom Softkey. Pressing the Zoom Softkey enlarges the graph representation.
AFCS
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
Landing Longitudinal CG
Current Longitudinal CG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Predicted CG Movement
due to Fuel Burn
APPENDICES
Zoom Softkey
Back Softkey
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-84 Weight & Balance Graph Zoomed
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The ‘Aircraft Weight and Balance’ and ‘ Estimated Weight’ Boxes contain entry fields for fuel, preflight, and
inflight weight calculations which use the following formulas:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• ‘Basic Empty Weight’ is calculated by summing the weights of the airframe/engine, fixed equipment, unusable
fuel, full oil and other items necessary for flight.
• ‘Zero Fuel Weight’ = Basic Empty Weight + Aircraft Load
• ‘Fuel on Board’ = Weight in pounds equal to set gallons on the ‘Initial Usable Fuel’ Page (via the Fuel Softkey)
• ‘Ramp Weight’ = Zero fuel weight + the confirmed Fuel on Board weight (static value confirmed by the pilot)
EIS
• ‘Takeoff Weight’ = Ramp Weight - fuel burned for start, taxi, and run-up
• ‘Current Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + current Fuel on Board
• ‘Est Landing Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + Estimated Landing Fuel weight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight = Fuel on Board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• ‘Excess Fuel’ weight = Estimated Landing Fuel Weight - Fuel Reserves Weight
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘Est Landing Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + Estimated Landing Fuel weight
• ‘Est Landing Fuel’ = Fuel on Board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• ‘Excess Fuel’ = Estimated Landing Fuel weight - Fuel Reserves weight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of four dashes:
• ‘Est Landing Weight’
• ‘Est Landing Fuel’
AFCS
• ‘Excess Fuel’
Viewing the zoomed CG Graph:
1) From the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page, press the Graph Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Zoom Softkey to switch between the zoomed and normal view for the ‘Station vs Weight’ graph.
Entering aircraft load:
1) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field within the ‘Aircraft Load’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the keypad to enter the weight.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all seat, fluid, and baggage weight values are accurate.
INDEX
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
276
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Usable Fuel Remaining
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Dark cyan displays fuel
quantity change
EIS
Fuel quantity change
Tabs Softkey
Full Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Undo Softkey
W&B Softkey
Figure 5-85 Initial Usable Fuel - intended changes
Entering the fuel on board weight on the ‘Initial Usable Fuel’ Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Fuel Softkey to display the ‘Initial Usable Fuel’ Page.
2) Add or subtract fuel:
Turn the FMS Knobs to match the fuel quantity.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the Full Softkey if the fuel tanks are full
Or:
Press the Tabs Softkey if the fuel level visually matches the physical tab level within each fuel tank.
3) Press the ENT Key or the W&B Softkey to return to the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key or the Confirm Softkey to confirm the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page entries, or press the
Undo Softkey to remove any fuel quantity changes that were made.
Entering the fuel reserves weight:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel Reserves’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the keypad to enter the fuel reserves weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
APPENDICES
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEIGHT AND BALANCE CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If the Ramp Weight is greater than the maximum allowable ramp weight, then the Ramp Weight is displayed
in amber.
If the Zero Fuel Weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the Zero Fuel Weight
is displayed in amber.
If the Takeoff Weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the Takeoff Weight is
displayed in amber.
EIS
If the Current Weight is outside the envelope, then the Current Weight is displayed in amber.
If the Estimated Landing Weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the Estimated
Landing Weight is displayed in amber.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the Estimated Landing Fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the Fuel Reserves weight, the
following values are displayed in amber:
- Estimated Landing Fuel weight
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Excess Fuel weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in amber:
- Estimated Landing Fuel weight
- Excess Fuel weight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft CG will lie outside the specified CG envelope at any time (to include remaining fuel burn
calculated after landing), then the respective Take Off triangle, Current diamond, Fuel Burn line, and/or Landing
square will be displayed in amber.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the value for the ‘Station’ Field is outside of the specified CG envelope, then the data in the ‘Station’ Field
will be displayed in amber.
278
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.10 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’
Page.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Softkeys
Figure 5-86 Trip Planning Page
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
APPENDICES
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information is GPS
altitude.
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours+minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected, the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (Sunrise, Sunset) - These times are shown as hours:minutes of the
time at the destination.
280
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current Ground Speed by the current
Fuel Flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours+minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of Fuel on Board by the current Fuel Flow.
EIS
• Fuel on Board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of Fuel on Board and subtracting the Fuel Required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of Remaining Endurance and subtracting the ETE to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the Fuel
Flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of Remaining
Endurance by the Ground Speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
AFCS
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection). In
manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Selected Leg(s)
Selected Flight Plan NN -
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-87 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
APPENDICES
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-88 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly next to the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint (or press the MENU Key and highlight ‘Set WPT to Present
Position’ if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the ‘Page Menu’
Window, and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
282
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the
system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when
available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode, airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly below and to the left of
the aircraft symbol on the CDI. The CDI deviation bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes
in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.).
Furthermore, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source
data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. If the VSD Inset is
selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
NOTE: GPS derived information will remain displayed in magenta (not amber) on the Flight Plan Progress
inset when operating in Dead Reckoning mode. However, this information shall still be considered as
degraded navigation source information.
APPENDICES
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Ground
Speed
Course Deviation
Indicator
Current
Track
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Estimated
Time Enroute
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Destination
Airport
Information
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft Symbol
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-89 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
284
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (Optional)
EIS
®
• L-3 Stormscope WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (Optional)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GTX 345R Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather,
Garmin Connext Weather, and Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather. For each source, a groundbased system processes the weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the optional Garmin GDL 69A or GDL 69 SXM SiriusXM Datalink
Receiver and an active service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits
this information to the aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous
reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the optional Garmin GSR 56 Iridium
Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the aircraft after the pilot
defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically recurring Connext Data Request.
The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service using the Iridium Satellite telephone system
and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide
weather coverage, but the availability of individual weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular region, visit
INDEX
http://www.flygarmin.com.
286
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
guide only discusses supported weather products.
EIS
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided
to activate the weather service. An Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. If the GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, these IDs may be identical. To view this
information, refer to the following locations:
• The ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page on the MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
These IDs may be the same.
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
AFCS
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
APPENDICES
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Press to Display XM
Information page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-1 ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Garmin Connext weather service requires an active Iridium satellite telephone and
weather data subscription. Registration begins by first obtaining the serial number(s) for the
installed Iridium Satellite Transceiver (GSR 1), and the System ID. Then go to the website
www.flygarmin.com and follow the instructions for establishing an account for Garmin Connext data services.
Note additional information about the airframe may be required. After an account has been established,
Garmin provides an access code that must be entered on the system and successfully transmitted to the
Garmin Connext service via the Iridium satellite network.
AFCS
Obtaining the LRU serial numbers and System ID:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the LRU Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll the cursor until ‘GSR 1’ is visible in the ‘LRU Information’ window.
4) Note the serial number displayed for ‘GSR 1’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
288
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System ID Number
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) Go to www.flygarmin.com. Locate the information for subscribing to Garmin Connext Satellite Services on the
website.
2) Choose a desired service which includes weather data and enter the requested information about the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Note the Access Code provided during the registration process and any additional instructions received.
4) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
Map page group.
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If another data link weather
source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather
source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change
the data link source to prior to registration.
6) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 8. Otherwise, press the MENU Key.
The page menu window is now displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
8) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in Figure 6-3.
9) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
APPENDICES
10) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted.
11) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
when the Current Registration Window displays the correct information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe
Serial Number, and Iridium Serial Number.
12) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
289
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-3 Enter Access Code
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne lightning detection system, data link weather by contrast relies on service providers to collect, process,
and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from a variety of sources such as
government agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link weather information,
it is imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time information and may
not accurately depict the current conditions.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as METAR flags, the system
can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the weather service
provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the information
contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is comprised
data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service provider
periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image which
becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for data
link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within the
mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention. The Garmin Connext weather service requires the pilot to select a manual or automatic (recurring)
weather data request in order to receive weather data updates.
INDEX
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
290
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the and expiration times for SiriusXM Weather and
FIS-B Weather, respectively. The FIS-B broadcast rate represents the interval at which the FIS-B Weather service
transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product information. It does not represent
the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The
service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject
to change.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
Cell Movement
30
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
METARs
90
City Forecast
90
Surface Analysis
60
Freezing Levels
120
Winds Aloft
90
County Warnings
60
Cyclone Warnings
60
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
Air Report(AIREP)
90
Turbulence
180
Radar Coverage Not Available
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
No product image
30
60
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
No product image
60
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
292
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FIS-B Weather Product
EIS
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
No product symbol
60
10
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No product symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and the
refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service makes available
the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which the service receives
new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to contact the Garmin Connext weather
service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext Data Request.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
30
Infrared Satellite
60
30
Datalink Lightning
30
Continuous
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
Continuous
METARs
90
Continuous
Winds Aloft
90
Continuous
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
90
Continuous
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Precipitation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin Connext Weather Product
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terminal Aerodrome Reports TAFs)
no product image
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3 and
10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Weather Data Link Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather information. This page
provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map on the system. The
Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link weather source, if more
than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link weather source (e.g., “XM”,
“CNXT”).
294
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-4 NEXRAD Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM, CNXT, or FIS-B)’ Page. The currently
selected data link weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, ‘Display Connext Weather’, or ‘Display FIS-B
Weather’ (choices may vary depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-5 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map
overlays used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page
based on the selected source.
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following tables.
Level 1
NEXRAD
Level 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Echo Top
CLD Top
XM LTNG
Cell MOV
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
More WX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyclone
SFC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FRZ LVL
Wind
296
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
Off
Current
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
selected future time period.
48 HR
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the chosen altitude.
the Surface (SFC) to Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
42,0000 feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
Back
ICNG
AFCS
AIREPS
PIREPS
County
Back
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Back
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting Turbulence
altitude from 21,000
feet to 45,000 feet
Next
Legend
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TURB
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
EIS
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
Next
Legend
Description
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
Disables the Icing weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PREV
Off
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Level 1
PRECIP
Level 2
Level 3
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
EIS
More WX
Wind
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Surface to 42,0000
feet
Next
Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Back
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PIREPs
Back
Description
Enables/disables the Precipitation weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
298
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
Level 1
NXRD
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off: No NEXRAD is shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
REG: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
Wind
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
PIREPs
Back
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
More WX
EIS
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
All: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS NEXRAD
data in other coverage areas.
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS
Knob.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
AFCS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-6 ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
CUSTOMIZING THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each weather
product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system
removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been installed, the
system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another source.
300
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is only applicable to SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
The pilot can select a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page, or choose to synchronize the map
orientation to the same orientation used on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Group options.
5) If SiriusXM is the selected data link weather source, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map’ Group and
press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
If FIS-B or Garmin Connext is the selected data link weather source, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
‘Orientation ‘ field at the bottom of the Product Group 1 list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired map orientation: North up, Track up, HDG up, or SYNC, then
press the ENT Key.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS
Cloud Top
+
Echo Top
+
Infrared Satellite
+
Data Link Lightning
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cell Movement
Winds Aloft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
METARs
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page
Group
+
Weather
Information Page
Weather Data
Link Page
+
‘Aux - Trip
Planning’ Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD/Radar Precipitation
Navigation Map
Page
EIS
Data Link Weather Product
PFD Maps
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Surface Analysis & City Forecast
+
Freezing Levels
+
+*
+
+
County Warnings
+
Cyclone Warnings
+
Icing Potential
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Winds Aloft data is not available inside the VSD when FIS-B is the active data link weather source.
Table 6-4 Weather Product Display Maps
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
302
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with
the Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
Showing/removing the weather legend on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
EIS
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
AFCS
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link products on the PFD map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
APPENDICES
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The setup menus for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map
range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger
than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map.
The page menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product
overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
EIS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field)
must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘INVALID COVERAGE
AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather coverage
area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel weather data
requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data Request.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections:
• Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining FPL’ to request weather data for
the remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
• Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and turn the small FMS Knob
to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page without requesting
weather data.
304
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-8 Connext Data Request Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
305
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with
an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request Menu may
be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue
to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete
depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present, and the
Iridium signal strength.
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
306
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if the
Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key. The request status box
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window indicates the
number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘Request Status’ Window
based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext
Data Request.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map -Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative terrain, echo
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
tops, icing, or turbulence data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
308
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based outside the continental United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the
lowest antenna tilt angle, known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate
the intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation, if known.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
EIS
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown for the selected region (US or Canada).
The pilot can change the region on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
Changing the NEXRAD coverage region:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region datafield.
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘COMP’ or ‘BASE’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
APPENDICES
The system can animate a loop of NEXRAD information. The animated view is available on the ‘Map Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page, and on navigation maps with the exception of the HSI Map. Animation begins
after the system has received at least two recent NEXRAD images since the avionics power cycle. When
NEXRAD animation is enabled, a timeline appears in the upper-right corner of the map, except for the PFD
Inset Map. A pointer on the timeline indicates the relative position of the displayed frame of animation,
from oldest to newest. The NEXRAD weather product age corresponds to the displayed frame. The system
can show up to six frames of NEXRAD animation when the USA coverage option is selected, and up to three
frames of animation when Canada is selected.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With ‘Product Group 1’ selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
EIS
The pilot enables/disables the NEXRAD animation feature for navigation maps from the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page.
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’ and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AFCS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
310
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
AFCS
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Strobes and spurious radar data.
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun).
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows.
APPENDICES
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
actual precipitation type.
EIS
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page - Canada
AFCS
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pilots are encouraged to check additional NOTAM sources to supplement FIS-B NOTAMs. NOTAMs
older than 30 minutes will not be displayed by FIS-B. For additional information refer to InFO 18008 and AC
00-63.
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
INDEX
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
312
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
EIS
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-13 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the NXRD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option displayed in cyan on the softkey (‘Off’,
‘US’, or ‘REG’, or ‘All’).
Or:
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the continental United
States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
Regional On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AFCS
No radar coverage
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-14 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page
APPENDICES
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
314
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
EIS
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page. For the NEXRAD legend, press the Legend Softkey when the
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
No radar coverage
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-15 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
APPENDICES
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Reflectivity
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
EIS
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground clutter.
• Strobes and spurious radar data.
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun).
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans.
316
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Boundary of
weather data
request
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-16 Precipitation Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page
APPENDICES
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey). This step is not necessary
on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
INDEX
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
317
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
All weather product legends can be viewed on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. For the
Precipitation legend, press the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No radar coverage
Boundary of
weather data
request
Figure 6-17 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
AFCS
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request encloses the
precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
APPENDICES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
318
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
EIS
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block represents
4 km2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-18 Precipitation Weather Product at 10 NM Map Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter.
• Strobes and spurious radar data.
APPENDICES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun).
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows.
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS (SIRISUXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
Figure 6-19 Echo Tops Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying Echo Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
No Radar Coverage
INDEX
Figure 6-20 Echo Tops Legend
320
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is approximately every
30 minutes. As with all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half
of the expiration time, which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be
amber during routine operation due to a less frequent broadcast rate compared to other data link weather
products.
EIS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-21 Cloud Tops Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-22 Cloud Tops Legend
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Data Link Lightning weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location
of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-23 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
AFCS
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, press the Legend Softkey when Data Link
Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-24 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
322
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
EIS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
AFCS
Figure 6-25 Cell Movement Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated Cel
MOV softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
APPENDICES
Displaying Cell Movement information on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the Cell MOV Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-26 Cell Movement Legend
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
324
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery.
Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-27 Infrared Satellite Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying Infrared Satellite information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-28 Infrared Satellite Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69A SXM receiver installed, the
EIS
SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been
received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
NOTE: For Garmin Connext Weather only, the entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown on the map as long as any
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
portion of it is issued within the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request.
AIRMET for
Turbulence
Convective
SIGMET
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
AFCS
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-29 SIGMET/AIRMET on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the ‘Map- Weather Data Link (XM, CNXT, or FIS-B)’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
326
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
EIS
Convective SIGMET Text
Figure 6-30 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-31 METAR Flags on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR and TAF data is displayed
first in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional
information not found in the decoded version.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
AFCS
1) On the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
328
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
EIS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-32 METAR and TAF Text on the ‘WPT - Weather Information’ Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the METAR legend on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page, press the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the available information‑.
AFCS
Figure 6-33 METAR Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
The system shows a solid METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR. Hollow
METAR flags appear next to flight plan waypoints which are not directly associated with a METAR, but a
METAR exists within 30 NM of the flight plan waypoint. When this occurs, additional information appears
with the METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page indicating the origin and relative location of the source
METAR.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying original METAR text on the ‘Map - Active Flight Plan’ Page:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
330
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Current Surface Analysis Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-35 Surface Analysis Legend
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
becomes available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-36 Freezing Level Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-37 Freezing Levels Legend
332
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the ‘Map -Weather Data Link
(FIS-B)’ Page.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-38 Winds Aloft Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
APPENDICES
Figure 6-39 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page when the SiriusXM or Garmin Connext Weather service is the active data link weather
source. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-40 ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
AFCS
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in the following table.
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10 knots
50 knots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-5 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
334
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page. This behavior can be changed on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Thunderstorm
Warning
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flood
Warnings
Figure 6-41 County Flood Warning Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the County Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-42 County Warnings Legend
336
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyclone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-43 Cyclone Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Cyclone Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-44 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: If a GDL 69 SXM or GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available
unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’
when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
Supercooled Large
Droplet Threat
Extreme Icing
Potential
AFCS
Light Icing Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Moderate Icing
Potential
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-45 Icing Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Figure 6-46 Icing Potential Legend
338
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-47 Turbulence Weather Product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-48 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
EIS
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent
PIREP
PIREP selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Routine
PIREP
AFCS
Figure 6-49 AIREPs and PIREPs on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
APPENDICES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
INDEX
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
340
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected PIREP
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Raw PIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-50 PIREP Text on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Information for
selected TFR
Figure 6-52 TFR Data on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM. CNXT, or FIS-B)’ Page or Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
342
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-53 Full Text for Selected TFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page control the map range settings above which TFR data
is decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page use settings based on those selected for the ‘Map Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range settings.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
EIS
On the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which
includes all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-54 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page
344
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Available
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No FIS-B weather data received from the transponder.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
Not Available
FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is not
receiving the FIS-B weather service.
Awaiting Data
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR Graphical
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
Regional NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
Winds/Temp Aloft
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
Status
Message
Enabled
Disabled
----------------
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page Item
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-6 ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the Request
Status Window.
Weather Request
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [1]
Connext Comm Error [2]
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to an error(s). Automatic weather
data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic updates.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred with an Integrated Aviations Units. The system should be
serviced.
Connext Comm Error [3] A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or a GIA is off-line.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Connext Comm Error [5] The Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this
error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Comm Error [9] An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Login Invalid
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Connext Server Temp
Inop
Connext Server Inop
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
No Connext
Subscription
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext services or the access code is
incorrect. Verify the access code. If information is correct, contact Garmin Aviation Support using
the information at www.flygarmin.com.
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system memory limits. Reduce the size of the
coverage area and issue another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data has
been received.
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Reduce Request Area
Request Canceled
Request Failed - Try
Again
INDEX
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Verify information entered matches the
information provided from Garmin during registration. If this error persists, contact Garmin Aviation
Support using the information at www.flygarmin.com.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
service in less than 30 minutes.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Table 6-7 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
346
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD maps will be available for display (see Table 6-4 for a list of weather products and their associated
map availability).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data
will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior
to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary Mode
(provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the ‘Map Stormscope®’ Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following
table to depict lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Lightning Age
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-8 Lightning Age and Symbols
348
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100
nm, and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-55 ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page with Cell Mode Selected
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode: on the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.
2) Press the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Select the ‘Map- Stormscope®’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL STORMSCOPE DISPLAYS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot can overlay Stormscope lightning information on navigation maps. When the overlay is enabled, and
the map range is within the maximum map range setting limits to display Stormscope lightning, a Stormscope
icon appears on the map. On the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, the selected Stormscope mode and strike rate
appear in the upper-right corner of the map. The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also has menus for selecting the
Stormscope mode, and for selecting the maximum map range to display lightning symbols for navigation maps.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-56 ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Setting up Stormscope options on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) On the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections:
•
Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
•
Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than this value is selected.
•
Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or
cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the menu.
350
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
STORMSCOPE ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
EIS
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
Manually clearing Stormscope lightning symbols from map displays:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
EIS
area.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B option. No terrain or obstacle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option when the Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B
(TAWS-B) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about Garmin SVT.)
• TAWS-B (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles are within
a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B furthermore provide advisory visual
annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected
flight path. This alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature. Compared to Terrain-SVT
alerting, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles. The
TAWS-B system includes more alerting capabilities than the Terrain-SVT system.
The terrain system requires the following for proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information
is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may
be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the
displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
INDEX
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
352
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems. GSL altitude accuracy is affected
by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widelyused MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
EIS
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, the system uses the
GPS position and GSL altitude to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding
terrain and obstacles. In this manner, the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
AFCS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the OnGround Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if
the On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the pilot with the most information possible.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On-Ground Legend
In-Air Legend
APPENDICES
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 6-57 Relative Terrain Legend
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
Projected Flight Path
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
EIS
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-58 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-59 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Inset Window shows terrain at least 2000 feet below the aircraft
INDEX
APPENDICES
altitude as gray.
354
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below
the aircraft altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft
altitude
Wire Obstacle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-9 Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Wire Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red wire obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude
Yellow wire obstacle is between the aircraft altitude to within 250 feet below the aircraft
altitude
White wire obstacle is more than 250 ft below the aircraft altitude
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-10 Relative Wire Obstacles and Colors
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-11 Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems show potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and
red as shown in the following table.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
EIS
or
TAWS-B Warning
PULL UP
Terrain-SVT Warning
TERRAIN
Caution
TERRAIN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN PAGE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
or
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’, or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is specialized to show terrain,
and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the
principal page for viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be
enabled for reference.
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If an obstacle and
the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to
emphasize the display of the potential impact area.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000 nm, which is indicated
on the map range arc.
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B’ Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
356
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• Terrain Display – Enables the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data or select ‘Off’ to disable; also sets
maximum map range at which terrain is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Point Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which
obstacles are shown.
• Wire Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of wire obstacle data and sets maximum range at which wire
obstacles are shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Orientation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Lighted
Obstacle (Above
or Within 100’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Wire
(between aircraft
altitude to within
250’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
AFCS
Figure 6-60 ‘Map - TAWS-B‘ Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIRE OBSTACLE INFORMATION AND ALERTING
APPENDICES
For additional safety, the terrain system incorporates Garmin’s WireAware™ wire obstacle information. For
wire obstacles such as power lines present in the obstacle database, the system shows these on the maps as well
as the Synthetic Vision display; see the Flight Instruments section for more information about Synthetic Vision
displays of power lines. For the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B only, this system can also issue cautions or warnings
for potential impact with wire obstacles.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
WireAware database information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which
are typically high voltage transmission lines depicted on VFR Sectional charts, and are considered of special
interest to fixed-wing pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys, canyons, or be in close
proximity to airports/heliports.
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
It is important to note the obstacle database does not contain all power lines. In fact, WireAware database
coverage is mostly limited to HOT power lines, such as the especially tall transmission lines and their associated
support structures. It does not typically have information for the more prevalent smaller utility poles or lines,
such as those found in residential areas. Furthermore, WireAware obstacle database coverage exists mainly in
the United States; with limited coverage in portions of Canada and Mexico. In addition, the height of the wire
obstacles is commonly estimated and should not be relied upon for maneuvering decisions.
NOTE: Wire obstacle symbols are not depicted in the Vertical Situation Display (VSD).
EIS
ADDITIONAL TERRAIN DISPLAY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’ or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is the principal map page for
viewing terrain information. Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and
pages:
• PFD Maps
• Trip Planning Page
• ‘Map - Navigation Map Page’
• Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu provides controls for enabling/disabling the display of relative
terrain, point obstacles (such as towers), and wire obstacles (such as power lines). The setup menu also controls
the map range settings above which terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range
larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/
disable function applies only to the MFD, while the maximum range setting also affects the PFD maps.
AFCS
When relative terrain is shown on maps other than the terrain page, a relative terrain icon appears on the
map. A relative terrain legend appears with the icon on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. The legend appears
by itself on the terrain page.
The pilot can display relative terrain information independently of point or wire obstacle information;
however, obstacles for which Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B warnings and cautions are issued are shown when terrain
is selected for display and the map range is within the setting limit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
Maps besides the terrain page use settings based on those selected for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map.
APPENDICES
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
INDEX
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Although the VSD does not display TerrainSVT or TAWS-B alerts and potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as
these systems to depict relative terrain and obstacles within the VSD.
358
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VSD DISPLAY
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page also control the display of this information in the VSD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the VSD is enabled, terrain and obstacles in the VSD will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low
enough or the VSD altitude range is high enough for the terrain to be in view (absolute terrain will be shown
in gray if the TER Softkey is selected off on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page).
Total VSD Width
0.6 nm
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
4.0 nm
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Phase
Approach
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution,
within a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the
map range. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest
during enroute or oceanic phases.
Table 6-13 VSD Terrain Width Varies with Phase of Flight
APPENDICES
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active
flight plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour
is based on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when
available, otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
INDEX
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Inset Softkey.
3) Press the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the VSD Inset Window.
Profile
View Path
Enabled
Navigation
Map Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain
Enabled
Icon
Terrain
Legend
Altitude
Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
AFCS
Figure 6-61 VSD on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with Relative Terrain Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for especially tall obstacles), a vertical
line appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-62 VSD with Tall Obstacles
360
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled
in Track Mode. White range markers on both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range
markers along the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four
nautical miles (or 7.5 km if configured for metric units).
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
EIS
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at
which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING DISPLAYS
AFCS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B software
algorithms. Terrain alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an
alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD. If the terrain page is not
displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pop-up
Alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-63 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Potential Impact
Area
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-64 TAWS-B Page with Alert Annunciation
362
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
WARNING - TERRAIN
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Line Clearance (RLC)
Warning
TERRAIN
WARNING - WIRE
“Warning; Wire, Wire”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
TERRAIN
WARNING - TERRAIN
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
TERRAIN
WARNING - OBSTACLE
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
TERRAIN
WARNING - OBSTACLE
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Line Impact Warning (ILI)
TERRAIN
WARNING - WIRE
“Warning; Wire, Wire”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - TERRAIN
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Line Impact Caution (ILI)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - WIRE
“Caution; Wire, Wire”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - TERRAIN
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Line Clearance
Caution (RLC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - WIRE
“Caution; Wire, Wire”
TERRAIN
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
TERRAIN
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Voice Alert
EIS
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except Terrain-SVT
Page)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/TerrainSVT Page Alert
Alert Type
AFCS
Table 6-14 Terrain SVT Alerts Summary
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following table lists the TAWS-B alerts.
PFD/TAWS-B
Page Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
PULL UP
PULL-UP
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
PULL UP
TERRAIN - PULL-UP
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
WIRE AHEAD - PULL-UP
“Wire Ahead; Pull Up, Pull Up”
PULL UP
WARNING - WIRE
“Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up”
PULL UP
TERRAIN AHEAD - PULL-UP
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up”
PULL UP
OBSTACLE - PULL-UP
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
PULL UP
OBSTACLE AHEAD - PULL-UP
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”
TERRAIN
CAUTION - TERRAIN
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
TERRAIN
TERRAIN - AHEAD
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
TERRAIN
CAUTION - WIRE
“Caution, Wire; Caution, Wire”
TERRAIN
WIRE AHEAD
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
TERRAIN
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
TERRAIN
OBSTACLE AHEAD
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
TERRAIN
TOO LOW - TERRAIN
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
TERRAIN
SINK RATE
“Sink Rate”
TERRAIN
DONT SINK
“Don’t Sink”
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Imminent Line Impact
Warning (ILI)
Reduced Required LIne
Clearance Warning (RLC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Required Reduced Line
Clearance Impact Caution
(RLC)
Imminent Line Clearance
Impact Caution (ILI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
PULL UP
INDEX
Table 6-15 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
364
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B compares the projected
flight path as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases.
The system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
EIS
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle/Line Clearance (RTC/ROC/RLC
respectively) and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle/Line Impact (ITI/IOI/ILI respectively).
Descending (FT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level (FT)
800
600
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
400
300
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
AFCS
Figure 6-65 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADDITIONAL TAWS-B ALERTING
In addition to the FLTA alerting discussed previously, TAWS-B provides the following additional types of
alerts.
APPENDICES
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6000
5500
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
5000
4500
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
500
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-66 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
APPENDICES
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-67 PDA Alerting Threshold
366
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual annunciations. NCR alerting is
only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet.
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less.
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees.
EIS
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss or sink rate.
1000
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
900
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-68 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
AFCS
1000
800
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
APPENDICES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
200
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
INDEX
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-69 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the TAWS-B “Five-hundred” voice alert is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain
(as determined by the GPS altitude and Terrain Database).
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the voice alert.
EIS
INHIBITING ALERTING
The pilot can manually inhibit FLTA alerts. If TAWS-B is installed, PDA alerts are also inhibited with FLTA
alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVT System
TAWS-B System
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-70 Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B or Terrain-SVT Alerting:
1) Select the Terrain page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey. Alerting is inhibited when softkey annunciator is green.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired inhibit or enable option and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
SYSTEM STATUS
TERRAIN-SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. A voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain
System Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ Page. The
voice alert “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the
aircraft is within the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
368
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
None
None
None
Single Aural Chime
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
TER INH
None
None
No GPS position
TER N/A
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TER N/A
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TER FAIL
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAIL
None
System Test Pass
Excessively degraded GPS
signal; or Out of database
coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System
audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid, and Terrain-SVT
operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN TEST
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TER TEST
System Test in Progress
EIS
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/Terrain-SVT
Page Annunciation
Alert Type
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area
re-entered.
Table 6-16 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
TAWS-B
AFCS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion. The pilot can also manually select a TAWS-B system test. The system test option
is unavailable when the ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
APPENDICES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS
signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert,
“TAWS Available”.
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/TAWS-B Page
Annunciation
TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
TAWS TEST
None
None
None
Single Aural Chime
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
TAWS INH
None
None
No GPS position
TAWS N/A
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS N/A
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
EIS
System Test pass
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS
signal; or Out of database
coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid; Invalid
software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS-B operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-17 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
370
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 TAS TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If a Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed with this traffic system, refer to the ADS-B traffic
discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The system enhances flight crew situational
awareness by displaying traffic information for detected transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking a total of 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S transponders.
The system can display a maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential simultaneously. No TAS
surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
AFCS
THEORY OF OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system interrogates the transponders of other aircraft in
the vicinity while monitoring for transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance,
relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The
traffic system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual
annunciations and voice alerts.
APPENDICES
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal
conditions, the TAS system scans transponder traffic up to 22 NM in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density, the on-board traffic system automatically reduces its interrogation
transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system can display the symbols shown in the following table.
Symbol
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range
ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer
range ring at proper bearing.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Table 6-18 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If not equipped with an Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) transponder, traffic
symbology will be displayed as in the following table:
TAS Symbol
Description
APPENDICES
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
INDEX
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-19 TAS Symbol Description with GTX 335 Transponder
372
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as an amber circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat. A Non- threat Advisory,
shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
EIS
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft. The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow
(for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-72 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-71 Intruder Altitude and Vertical
Trend Arrow
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending beyond the
traffic symbol in the direction of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or relative motion
vectors are enabled; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion for more information.
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
AFCS
The traffic system automatically reduces its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during certain flight conditions. Level A (reduced) TA sensitivity normally applies when the aircraft
is less than 2,000 feet above ground level. If the system cannot determine this height, then Level A TA
sensitivity applies when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots. In all other conditions, the system uses Level
B (increased) sensitivity in order to determine TA threats.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.2 NM.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.55 NM.
Table 6-20 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC ALERTS
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
AFCS
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. The announcement “Traffic! 12
o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and
approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system displays the TA traffic on a PFD map. If a navigation map, such as the Inset Map or HSI map was
already shown on the PFD prior to the TA occurrence, the system automatically enables the traffic overlay
on the map if necessary in order to show the TA. If no map was shown on the PFD prior to the TA, then the
Traffic Inset Map is displayed on the PFD.
APPENDICES
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will
indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
INDEX
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
374
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-73 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-21 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick (up
to 40 mn) as indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the ‘Map Traffic Map’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other NonThreat Traffic,
1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
500’ above,
climbing
EIS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
2.0 nm away,
600’ above,
descending
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-74 ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page with TAS and ADS-B Traffic Displayed
Displaying traffic on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode.
AFCS
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
test during flight.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
approximately ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is
displayed on the traffic maps.
APPENDICES
If the aircraft has ADS-B In capability, the system announces “Traffic System Test”, and the test pattern
corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the west, level Other Non-Threat traffic
is shown to the northwest, and a descending Proximity Advisory is in the northeast, relative to own aircraft. If
the system test passes, the traffic system enters standby mode, and no traffic failure annunciations are displayed
on the traffic maps.
INDEX
If the aircraft does not have ADS-B In capability, the test pattern is fixed and does not correspond to the
aircraft heading. If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed” Otherwise the
system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic system enters
Standby Mode.
376
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the Joystick to adjust the map range to 2 NM for the inner range ring, and 6 NM for the outer range ring.
This ensures the full traffic test pattern is depicted on the map.
3) If the traffic system is in Operating Mode, press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
4) Select the Test Softkey.
Or:
EIS
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the MENU Key and turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B Test Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-75 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATION
NOTE: The traffic unit automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
APPENDICES
At the beginning of the avionics power cycle,, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must be in
Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Pressing the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating
Mode as necessary. Pressing the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Selecting a TAS Operating Mode:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select Standby Mode, press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the desired mode and press the ENT Key.
EIS
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. If the
system issues a TA occurring outside of this airspace, it will always be shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the altitude range of traffic display:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see Softkey description in previous step 2):
•
Above.
•
Normal.
•
Below.
Unrestricted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
•
Traffic Map Page Display Range
INDEX
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
378
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B).
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B).
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B).
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B).
•
2 and 6 nm.
•
6 and 12 nm.
•
12 and 24 nm.
•
24 and 40 nm.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
750 ft (with optional ADS-B).
EIS
•
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
• Navigation Map Page (Heading Up orientation
only)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
is also available on the following other MFD maps and pages as an additional reference to the ‘Map - Traffic
Map’ Page:
• Nearest Pages
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
AFCS
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate
traffic is enabled for display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
379
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Advisory
EIS
Traffic Advisory
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-76 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
option is installed and enabled. See the Flight Instruments section for details.
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD navigation map):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the traffic overlays.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
Customizing the traffic display on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off.
APPENDICES
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic.
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories.
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only.
INDEX
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown.
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off.
380
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls
the map range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range
larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the ‘Map Traffic Map’ Page use settings based on those selected for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
A Traffic Map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map will appear in
heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic and optional
data link weather information on navigation maps.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The HSI can also present a version of the Traffic Map. Traffic operating mode information is not present on
this map. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about displaying maps on the HSI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-77 HSI Traffic Map
Enabling/disabling traffic information on HSI map:
AFCS
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the traffic overlay.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
TEST
Traffic System Test
Initiated
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page))
Operating
EIS
OPERATING
STANDBY
Standby
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
(also shown in white in center of page)
Traffic System Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-22 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
FAILED
AFCS
Table 6-23 TAS Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
APPENDICES
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
*Shown as symbol on ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
**Shown in center of ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
Table 6-24 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
382
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder sends and receives Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
(ADS-B) traffic information on the 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) frequency. It receives ADS-B traffic
and data link weather information on the 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) frequency. The system
provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot visually acquire potentially conflicting
traffic. This discussion covers the traffic features of the GTX transponder; refer to the Flight Information ServiceBroadcast (FIS-B) Weather section for more information about the UAT data link weather features of the GTX 345.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three segments:
ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on fixed
objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail Number,
ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
AFCS
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
ATC
UAT
UAT
APPENDICES
RADAR
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
Figure 6-78 ADS-B System
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground station,
and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the data
from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
Because the GTX 345R transponder sends and receives ADS-B traffic reports on the 1090 ES frequency,
but only receives traffic reports on the 978 MHz UAT frequency, the presents of an ADS-R ground station is
necessary for an aircraft with only UAT capabilities to ‘see’ the aircraft with the GTX 345R transponder.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
AFCS
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
APPENDICES
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage, or own
INDEX
aircraft is equipped with a TAS system and traffic is within the TAS surveillance range.
Table 6-25 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
384
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an optional active traffic system, such as a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed and operating
with an optional GTX 345R transponder, the transponder receives traffic from the active traffic system and
attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B traffic the transponder is tracking. When a correlation
is made, the only the traffic with the most accurate information is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that
is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This
correlation of traffic by the transponder improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the
occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
EIS
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The optional TAS system issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using TAS alerting criteria. The ADS-B
system issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using the Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA) criteria.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
The system issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two O’clock,
Low, Two Miles.”
AFCS
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
385
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sensitivity
Level
EIS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
GPS Phase of Flight
Any
Any
Approach
Any
Any
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
Table 6-26 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
APPENDICES
• If the PFD Inset Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise the Traffic
Map is shown on the PFD.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a amber text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
INDEX
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
386
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-79 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
“One o’clock” through “Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
Approximate Distance (nm)
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Table 6-27 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
AFCS
ADS-B can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF).
The system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five nautical miles and 1,500 feet above the nearest
airport. When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page, discussed later in this section.
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SURF Application
On
EIS
Ground-based
vehicle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft on the
ground
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-80 ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page with SURF Mode On
388
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table. Above or below the traffic symbol
is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic
is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-28 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
APPENDICES
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
INDEX
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other NonThreat Traffic,
1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
500’ above,
climbing
EIS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
2.0 nm away,
600’ above,
descending
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-81 ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled. Otherwise the test mode is not available.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
390
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes about ten seconds
to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on any displayed
traffic maps. The test pattern corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the
west, level Other Non-Threat traffic is shown to the northwest, and a descending Proximity Advisory is in
the northeast, relative to own aircraft. The voice alert “Traffic System Test” indicates the traffic system test is
complete, and the system enters Standby Mode.
ADS-B Test Mode
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-82 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
AFCS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
APPENDICES
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
INDEX
Or:
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
Above.
•
Normal.
•
Below.
•
Unrestricted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
AFCS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-83 ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
392
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Motion
Vectors
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Motion Vectors
Selected
Figure 6-84 ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft.
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
AFCS
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
APPENDICES
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
3) Press the Duration Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
INDEX
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service
vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional information appears in
a window in the upper-right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The pilot can adjust the range of traffic displayed on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. Range indications
appear on rings shown on the page. The minimum map range is 750 feet. A maximum map range of 40
nautical miles is available.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
750 ft.
•
750 ft and 1500 ft.
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm.
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm.
•
1 and 2 nm.
•
2 and 6 nm.
•
6 and 12 nm.
•
12 and 24 nm.
•
24 and 40 nm.
APPENDICES
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps. Refer to the previous TAS discussion
INDEX
for information about these additional traffic displays.
394
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
FAILED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B: TEST
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-31 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-29 ADS-B Modes
Traffic Map Pane Icon
AFCS
ADS-B Ground Station Reception Status
Receiving ADS-B traffic services from a ground
station
Not receiving ADS-B traffic services from a
ground station
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page displays a white antenna icon to indicate the successful reception of ADS-B traffic
services from a ground station. A white-X over this icon indicates reception of ADS-B services is unavailable.
Table 6-30 ADS-B Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map - Traffic
Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Table 6-31 Traffic Failure Annunciations
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the GTX 345R transponder has failed, the GTS 825 TAS enters failure mode, and the system will not
display traffic information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
EIS
TA OFF SCALE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA X.X ± XX
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted
data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
*Shown as symbol on ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
**Shown in center of ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
Table 6-32 Traffic Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
Figure 6-85 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page
396
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Available to Run
Not Available
Fault
Not Configured
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On
EIS
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Status Message
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Table 6-33 ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
397
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
398
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
NOTE: The current pertinent flight manual always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
• GDU 1250A Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) (1)
• GDU 1250A Multi-Function Display (MFD) (1)
- GDU 1050A Alternate MFD
• GIA 64W Integrated Avionics Units (IAUs) (2)
• GSA 80/81 AFCS Servos (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- GDU 1050A Alternate PFD
EIS
The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the system's avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description. AFCS
functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter (1)
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes (2) (1 optional)
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Director (FD) — The aircraft has two flight directors, each operating within a GIA and referred to as
pilot-side and copilot-side. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos adapter. It also
provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands,
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination
in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in the Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation section.
APPENDICES
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFD.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will
be annunciated.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight director modes remain
unchanged.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on each control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFD. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
–
Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
–
Operating the MEPT Switch (located on the each control wheel)
–
Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following controls are located on the AFCS Control Unit:
1
HDG Knob
Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI
Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading
2
APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
AP Key
4 LVL Key
Engages/disengages the Autopilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
5
6
AFCS
7
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
10
APPENDICES
11
12
UP/DN Wheel Adjusts the reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, and Altitude
Hold modes (see Flight Director Vertical Modes Table) for change increments in each
mode)
FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
VNV Key
Selects/deselects VNAV Path Descent Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
ALT SEL Knob Controls the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments. Press to synchronize the Selected
Altitude to the current altitude.
ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
VS Key
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only
FD Key
Pressing once turns on the selected Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
modes. Pressing again deactivates the Flight Director and removes the Command
Bars. If the Autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
INDEX
13
Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot
engagement limitations) and selects level vertical and lateral modes on the flight director
400
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3
13
12
11
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
EIS
10
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-1 GMC 707 AFCS Control Unit
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TO/GA Switch
(Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot and flight director and interrupts pitch trim operation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The TO/GA Switch is located on the throttle.
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LVL Button
Level Mode
AFCS
MET Switch
(Manual Electric An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
Trim)
Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim.
The LVL Button engages the autopilot in Level Mode for pitch and roll.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the pawth shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in the table below (when the flight director is not active) activates the pilot-side
flight director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from
the displays by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
TO/GA Switch
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
LVL Key
Heading Select
Level
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FD Key
AP Key
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Modes Selected
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
LVL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
Level
PIT
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
AFCS STATUS BOX
INDEX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes
are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and active in green.
402
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Active
Active
Vertical Modes
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Armed
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
Lateral Modes
Armed
AFCS Status Box
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Command
Bars
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Speed
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
AFCS
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode for
the axis. Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation
moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
EIS
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single cue.
The Aircraft Symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command Bars do not
override the Aircraft Symbol. In the following figure, the single-cue Command Bars move together vertically
to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. If a compatible lift computer is
installed, the cross-pointer option will be unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars
Aircraft Symbol
AFCS
Figure 7-4 Single-cue Command Bars
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
404
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 AFCS MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES
Pitch Hold
Vertical Speed
(default)
-15° to
+20°
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
80 to
185 kts
1 kt
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed while the aircraft is climbing/
descending to the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Description
Reference
Change
Increment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Mode
Reference
Control Annunciation
Range
EIS
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while
operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable
ranges of values for each of these references using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
AFCS
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
APPENDICES
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode
is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
AFCS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed. The ALT SEL Knob
on the MFD is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture
Mode becomes active.
APPENDICES
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The Selected
Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
INDEX
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
406
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
EIS
Changing the Selected Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Use of the ALT SEL Knob on the MFD to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture
Mode is active causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode
armed for the new Selected Altitude.
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude error is
less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
Changing the Altitude Reference
AFCS
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
The Altitude Reference (shown in the AFCS Status Box) may be changed by using the NOSE UP/NOSE
DN Keys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
AFCS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
408
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical
Speed
Reference
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
Bug
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
AFCS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
AFCS
Lateral Mode
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
Roll Hold
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Description
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
APPENDICES
ROL
25°
HDG
25°
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
NAV
Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VOR
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
INDEX
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
410
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls wings level.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank
angle condition.
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
EIS
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: A 'Roll mode active' alert will show in the Alerts Window when ROL mode is active for 30 seconds.
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
AFCS
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Turns are commanded in the same direction as
Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g.,
a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn
reversals.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select
Mode Active
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: A 'Heading mode active for extended period' Alert will show in the Alerts Window when HDG mode
is active and the heading bug has not been changed for 10 minutes.
HEADING BUG SYNC MODE
AFCS
Heading bug sync mode is selectable by pushing the HDG Knob during AFCS coupled modes that provide
course guidance. These modes include:
• Approach GPS
• Approach LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Approach VOR
• NAV GPS
• NAV LOC
APPENDICES
• NAV VOR
• NAV LOC BC
• Roll Coupled Approach
• Roll Coupled NAV
INDEX
Sync mode will continuously update the heading bug to the current aircraft heading, eliminating the need
to sync the heading bug any time a turn is completed. Should the AFCS mode uncouple due to a fault or user
change, the bug will already be set to continue along the current bearing with HDG mode. The heading bug
sync mode will automatically turn off if the AFCS coupled mode is not one of those listed. Heading bug sync
mode can be deselected at any time by pressing the HDG Knob again or by rotating the HDG Knob.
412
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The heading bug sync mode will also be briefly applied, although not annunciated, if the HDG Knob is
pushed while HDG is the active coupled mode and the aircraft is not level. This allows for a smooth rollout
onto the new heading, rather than an S-turn back to a heading that has been turned past.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
EIS
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
SBAS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the
NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
AFCS
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
APPENDICES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VOR Navigation
Mode Active
VOR is Selected
Navigation Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track GPS Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode
414
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Description
Vertical Path Tracking
Glideslope
VPTH
ALTV
GP
GS
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically
armed)
VAPP
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level on the
ground in preparation for
takeoff
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the
air
TO
7°
GA
7°
TO/GA
Switch
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around**
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source APR Key
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
AFCS
Takeoff
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
GPS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
25° Capture
10° Track
BC
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Reference
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
Captures and tracks descent
legs of an active vertical VNV Key
profile
Captures
the
Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
*
Altitude
Captures and tracks the
SBAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Captures
and
tracks
a localizer signal for NAV Key
backcourse approaches
Annunciation
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Control
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
APPENDICES
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active. Refer to the Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Section for more information on VNV flight plans.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations
when VNV flight planning is available. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
416
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
AFCS
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Capture
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
APPENDICES
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
INDEX
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
418
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-17 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
EIS
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected Altitude.
The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target Altitudes are
shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded from a database
(see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute” is annunciated
in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator.
AFCS
NOTE: When the Selected Altitude is set to the VNV Target Altitude, Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
will be armed even though the altitude value is part of the active VNAV flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
EIS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
Figure 7-18 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture mode
are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending on
which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management Section
for details).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when
the CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the
active lateral mode). If the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key
is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
INDEX
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
420
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting GPS Approach Mode without a Glidepath:
1) Ensure a SBAS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the NAV Key.
EIS
Figure 7-19 GPS Approach Mode Armed
Glidepath Mode (GP)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting GPS Approach Mode with a Glidepath:
1) Ensure a SBAS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP+V, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight
plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (SBAS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Non-precision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
Figure 7-20 Glidepath Mode Armed
APPENDICES
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
GPS Approach
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Glidepath
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
LPV Approach
Active
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-21 Glidepath Mode
AFCS
Glideslope Mode (GS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode without a Glideslope:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
APPENDICES
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the NAV Key.
Or:
INDEX
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
422
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When
Glideslope Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral
flight director mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode with a Glideslope:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-22 Glideslope Mode Armed
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
Approach
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Glideslope
Mode Active
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NAV1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
INDEX
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 7-23 Glideslope Mode
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Once the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
EIS
Intercepting And Flying A DME Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides
vectors to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not
automatically intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS
Navigation Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the
beginning of the arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects
GPS Navigation Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
In Takeoff and Go Around modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The TO/GA
Switch is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground or airborne. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at
least 400 feet below the Selected altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and provides a climb reference after takeoff.
This mode can be selected only while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director
Command Bars assume a wings-level, pitch-up attitude. FLC mode is armed and NAV or HDG lateral modes
may be armed as well. Selected Altitude Capture mode is armed after selected altitude is set.
424
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Takeoff Mode
Active
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Takeoff
Pitch
Target
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Reference
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-24 Takeoff Mode Selected on the Ground
At rotation speed, the pilot should begin to pitch the aircraft up to place the aircraft symbol into the takeoff
pitch target seen below. The FD will automatically transition to the armed lateral and/or vertical modes at
400 feet AGL.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Autopilot Engaged
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 7-25 Takeoff Mode with Autopilot Engaged
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
During the next phase of the takeoff, the flight director will automatically transition from TO Vertical
Guidance mode to FLC mode along with the selected appropriate lateral mode. The FLC mode annunciation
will become active and the speed reference at transition is synced to the current speed.
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Airspeed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airspeed
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-26 FLC Mode Active
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to
the desired climb profile while maintaining the Airspeed Reference.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Airspeed Reference (shown above the Airspeed Indicator and as an AFCS annunciation) may be
adjusted by using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e.,
with the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Go Around
Mode Active
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-27 Go Around Modes
426
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.4 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the current pertinent flight manual for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch trim
(MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim wheel. Trim
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
AFCS
ROLL AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot engagement.
APPENDICES
The system automatically engages the yaw damper independent of the autopilot. When the AP key is
pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated and the annunciator
lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot are illuminated. The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll
Hold Modes when initially activated.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are
activated and the annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and yaw damper are illuminated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
EIS
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw
Damper
Engaged
Figure 7-28 Autopilot And Yaw Damper Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The yaw damper will engage automatically when the aircraft climbs through 200' AGL and disengages when
the aircraft descends through 200' AGL. The yaw damper will always engage when the autopilot is engaged.
Disabling ESP on the 'Aux - System Setup 2' page will disable the automatic yaw damper engagement.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green 'AP' and 'YD' annunciations respectively.
DISENGAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC, MEPT Switch, or the AP Key on the
AFCS Control Unit. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and
a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. The AP DISC or MEPT Switch may be used to cancel the aural
alert.
The MEPT and AP DISC Switches can be used to disengage the yaw damper. The ‘YD’ and ‘AP’ annunciations
turn yellow and flash for 5 seconds upon disengagement.
AFCS
Figure 7-29 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MEPT Switch.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Stall warning
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
APPENDICES
• Roll Trim input
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
INDEX
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
428
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-31 Automatic Autopilot and
Yaw Damper Disengagement
LEVEL MODE
EIS
Pitch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Roll
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level Mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LVL Button (located on the instrument panel) engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is
disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes.
While Level Mode does not track altitude or heading, it will adjust the pitch angle to maintain zero vertical
speed. When the LVL Button is pressed, all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight
director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll. While in level mode, all other modes are available by pressing
the corresponding button.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
Figure 7-32 Level Mode Annunciation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in the following table (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFDs above
the Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized
by criticality.
EIS
AFCS Status
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS
Figure 7-33 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Elevator Mistrim Down
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
PTRM
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
Roll Failure
ROLL
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
PTCH
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
AFCS
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
PFT
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail
their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
PFT
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
Preflight Test
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Description
Table 7-6 AFCS Status Alerts
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
APPENDICES
Underspeed Protection is available when the optional Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system is
installed and the autopilot is on. It is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established
airspeeds.
INDEX
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (see pertinent flight manual for airspeeds which are
dependant upon flap setting, and anti-ice system onboard), a flashing yellow ‘MINSPD’ annunciation will
appear above the airspeed indicator.
430
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 7-34 MINSPD Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the airspeed trend vector reaches the predetermined airspeed, a single aural “AIRSPEED” will sound,
alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight
director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided
into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical
modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical modes).
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA, FLC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change from
active to armed, and the autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down and the wings to level.
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
AFCS
Figure 7-35 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation will appear to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator. The pitch down force will continue until
the aircraft reaches a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the IAS at which stall warning turns off, plus two
knots.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-36 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference and
the vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (PIT, VS, VNAV, IAS)
EIS
When the aircraft decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red
“UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE” annunciation will appear to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator.
The vertical flight director mode will change from active to armed, and the autopilot will cause the aircraft to
pitch down until reaching a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed.
When the airspeed trend vector reaches an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a single
aural "AIRSPEED" will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-37 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the minimum commandable
autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference and
the vertical flight director mode will change from armed to active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath modes.
AFCS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Indicator
INDEX
Figure 7-38 Overspeed Annunciation
432
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LEVEL MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot and Yaw Damper (if the autopilot is disengaged and the
aircraft is within the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes. Level Mode does not
track altitude or heading. When engaged all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight
director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll. While in level mode, all other modes are available by pressing
the corresponding button.
Level mode also becomes active as a function of Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP). Refer to the
Additional Features section for a detailed discussion of the ESP feature.
EIS
Roll
Pitch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-39 Level Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may
supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:
EIS
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an outof-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.
AFCS
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
434
Pilot's Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• FliteCharts® and Chartview electronic charts
• Flight Data Logging
• Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
• Electronic Checklists
• SurfaceWatch™
• Auxiliary Video (Optional)
• WiFi Connections
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™)
• Connext®
• Hypoxia Recognition System with Automatic Descent
Mode
• Position Reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio entertainment
EIS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service, and
Short Message Service (SMS).
The optional SurfaceWatch feature provides voice and visual annunciations to aid in maintaining situational
awareness and avoid potential runway incursions during ground and air operations in the airport environment.
AFCS
WiFi setup allows for the transmission of data recorded by the Maintenance Logs feature as well as weather
information while aircraft is on ground. The recording of this data is not visible to the pilot and requires no pilot
interaction, other than setting up WiFi connections where applicable.
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection between
the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
APPENDICES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the Data Link Receiver handles more than
170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer
range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up to
16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD.
The CMC Data Logging feature allows the pilot and maintenance crews to view event/fault monitoring and
logged data on the aircraft.
INDEX
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Auxiliary Video provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system.
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system discourages aircraft operation outside the normal flight
envelope.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Hypoxia Recognition System with Automatic Descent Mode provides protection to aircraft occupants from
succumbing to the debilitating affects of hypoxia.
436
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Inset Map (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• NDB Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo approaching the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Features
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the softkey
is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Selecting the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Selecting the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Selecting the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
AFCS
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the SafeTaxi range of distances.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
438
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 CHARTS
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts (FliteCharts)
and Jeppesen terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the databases for both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts brand, or
source, can be selected for viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is shown on the information
pane under Source.
Selecting preferred charts source:
EIS
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Charts Setup’ menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Preferred Charts Source’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preferred Charts Source Option
AFCS
Chart Setup Option
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
439
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Chart
Source
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan
view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The georeferenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position
of this information, as it relates to the chart plan view, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when
the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart plan
view, not to the off-scale area.
440
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Inset Box
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off-Scale
Area
EIS
Off-Scale
Areas
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the georeferenced aircraft symbol.
• Departure Procedures (DP)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
AFCS
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting terminal procedures charts:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST - Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu and select Show Charts.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the charts.
4) Use the softkeys at the bottom of the screen to select the appropriate chart.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
441
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Chart Softkeys
Figure 8-5 Selecting Charts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner No Available Charts appears on the screen. The
banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart
selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-6 No Available Charts
AFCS
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
APPENDICES
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
INDEX
The airport runway diagram is usually displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ page after the Info
Softkey is pressed. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
442
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a chart:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’
Page, press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page. (Press the APR Softkey if not already selected).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Charts’ Box.
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
EIS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Charts’ Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Scale
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
APPENDICES
While the Charts Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart is
selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the Charts Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries.
AFCS
Figure 8-9 Additional Airport Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
444
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
- Pressing the SYNC Softkey displays the database linked chart associated with the current phase of flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are
available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the
flight that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen database
published NOTAMs.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
- Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, All View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
AFCS
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
446
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting additional information:
1) While viewing the Airport Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Full Screen Off’ Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Chart Setup Option
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
Selecting day, night, or automatic view:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Charts Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
447
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Charts Setup’ Menu.
INDEX
Figure 8-14 Airport Information Page, Day View
448
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
`
Figure 8-15 Airport Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The georeferenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are georeferenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
AFCS
Figure 8-16 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart plan view, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart plan view,
not to the off-scale area.
• Departure Procedures (DP)
APPENDICES
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inset Box
Off-Scale
Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Off-Scale
Areas
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the georeferenced aircraft symbol.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
AFCS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Charts, Info, DP, STAR, APR, NOTAM, and
CHECKLIST. NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and
is disabled. The CHECKLIST Softkey appears subdued if not installed. The Charts Softkey appears on the
Airport Information Page.
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ROT CCW, ROT CW, All, Header, Plan, Profile, Minimums, Fit WDTH, and Back.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the CHRT Opt softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
APPENDICES
Selecting terminal procedures charts:
While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST - Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
450
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to ‘Show Charts.’
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While on the Page Menu, Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key to display the
chart.
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner No Available Charts appears on the screen.
The No Available Charts banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a
particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
EIS
Figure 8-18 No Available Charts Banner
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-19 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
AFCS
The airport runway diagram is usually displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ page after the Info
Softkey is pressed. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a chart:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’
Page, press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Charts’ Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if not already selected).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Charts’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-20 Selecting a Chart
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
INDEX
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen (see above).
452
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the Charts Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group.
Pressing the Info Softkey displays the Airport Diagram.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
CHART OPTIONS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the ROT CCW Softkey rotates the chart counterclockwise.
Pressing the ROT CW Softkey rotates the chart clockwise.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Full Screen Off’ Option and press the ENT Key.
The full screen view can be turned back on by following the previous steps and selecting ‘Full Screen On’
Option.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-21 Full Screen On or Off
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Charts Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting day, night, or automatic view:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu ‘Options.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Charts Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-22 Page Menu Chart Setup
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Charts Setup’ Menu.
454
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
IFR/VFR CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation
Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be
overlaid on the chart:
EIS
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 2.5 nm.
AFCS
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available, a
range of 5 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 6 nm, the system will
automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a ‘gray circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
The georeferenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are georeferenced. IFR/VFR charts may be viewed
by selecting the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
VFR Chart
Map Range
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Active Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
Figure 8-23 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:
1) Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
2) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired chart.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
IFR Low Chart
Map Range
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
APPENDICES
Active Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
Figure 8-24 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Chart
456
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IFR High Chart
Map Range
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Active Flight Plan Leg
EIS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-25 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 SATELLITE PHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
The Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service, and
Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
EIS
For aircraft equipped with an Iridium Transceiver and a Flight Stream 510, calls and SMS text can be made
using a Personal Electronic Device through the Garmin Pilot App. Please refer to the Garmin Pilot user guide for
Iridium Datalink.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR 1) and the System ID by selecting
the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page. Contact Garmin at www.flyGarmin.com.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DISABLE/ENABLE IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turned on or off by performing these simple steps.
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page.
INDEX
Figure 8-26 ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page
458
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-27 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
7) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 4, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page.
Viewing the Satellite Phone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ page.
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of voice and/or data
transmissions.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
EIS
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone is disabled
AFCS
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other phone is on hold
APPENDICES
Phones are connected
INDEX
Table 8-1 Telephone Symbols
460
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CONTACTS
The names, telephone number, and email addresses can be saved in a list of contacts for easy use when
making telephone calls.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Entering a new contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘New Entry’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves the ‘Name’ field of the ‘Contact Details’ window.
EIS
4) Enter the desired name of the new contact. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the
PFD/MFD Controller, the FMS Knob on the PFD/MFD Controller, or via the FMS Knob on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-28 PFD/MFD Controller
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Phone Number’ field.
6) Enter the desired telephone number. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/
MFD Controller, the FMS Knob on the PFD/MFD Controller, or via the FMS Knob on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Email’ field.
8) Enter the desired email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD
Controller, the FMS Knob on the PFD/MFD Controller, or via the FMS Knob on the MFD.
APPENDICES
9) Press the Symbols Softkey to display the “at” symbol, the period, and other special characters.
Figure 8-29 Special Characters
10) Press the ENT Key. The Save Button is highlighted.
INDEX
11) Press the ENT Key. The new contact entry is added to the list of saved contacts.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
3) Press the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the selected contact.
Editing a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone Page’ displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor is placed in the ‘Name’ field. Enter the desired changes. Entry can be
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Controller, the FMS Knob on the PFD/MFD
Controller, or via the FMS Knob on the MFD.
4) Press the ENT Key when each field is complete. The Save Button is now highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to save the changes.
Figure 8-30 Editing a Contact
INCOMING CALLS
INDEX
APPENDICES
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and
an aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium will
be displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the popup alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the voice alert
“Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
pressing the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
462
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the Phone Key on the audio panel.
2) Press the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page:
1) Press the Phone Key on the audio panel.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
EIS
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Pressing
the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page allowing additional call information to be
viewed before answering.
Muting incoming call alerts:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
OUTGOING CALLS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
1) Press the Phone Key on the audio panel.
2) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page displayed, press the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar
AFCS
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone:
Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used
when calling other satellite telephone systems.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
463
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-31 Enter Phone Number
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by using the FMS Knob on the MFD..
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
Figure 8-32 Make the Call
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
464
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-33 System is Making the Connection
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, press the Hangup Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-34 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
Making an external call from the cockpit by using the Contact List:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Phone Key on the audio panel.
2) With the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired contact name in the list of contacts.
4) Press the Call Softkey. The external call is initiated and the number associated with the contact name is dialed.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
Placing a call on hold:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between the cockpit and an
external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold. Press the Hold Softkey again to resume
the call.
AFCS
Figure 8-35 Cockpit Phone on Hold
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address. Senders should address text messages to aircraft by entering [aircraft Iridium
phone number]@msg.iridium.com.
APPENDICES
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Satellite Phone’.
INDEX
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page.
466
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-36 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
AFCS
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Text message has been sent
APPENDICES
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
Table 8-2 Text Message Symbols
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed
when a new text message is received.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
New Text Message Symbol on MFD
New Text Message Pop-up
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 New Text Message Received
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the popwindow and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘Aux - Text
Messaging’ Page.
Figure 8-38 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
INDEX
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
468
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-39 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page.
APPENDICES
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
469
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-40 Composing a New Text Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through use of the FMS Knob and softkeys on
the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters, numbers and the “at” symbol, or numbers can be entered from
the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately after confirming you want the message to be sent, or
press the Save Softkey to save the message in Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to
delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
470
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-41 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
4) Press the New Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-42 Composing a Predefined Message
APPENDICES
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
use of the FMS Knob and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters, numbers and the “at”
symbol, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock
Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the
Symbols Softkey.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Or:
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Pressing the Cancel
Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
Sending a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, select the New Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) The SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired telephone
number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through use of the FMS Knob and softkeys on the MFD.
The FMS Knob is used to enter letters, numbers and the “at” symbol, or numbers can be entered from the
MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
Figure 8-43 Predefined Message Softkey Shown When Composing a Message
INDEX
4) Press the PREDEFD Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
472
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
EIS
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Showing Inbox messages:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Outbox Softkey and
the Drafts Softkey to only display the Inbox.
Or:
1) If the Inbox is not already displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-44 Text Message Inbox
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Showing Outbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Inbox Softkey and
the Drafts Softkey to only display the Outbox.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) If the Outbox is not already displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
EIS
Showing Draft messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Inbox Softkey and
the Outbox Softkey to only display the Draft messages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) If the Draft messages are not already displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Time Softkey if not
already selected.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Type Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
474
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Address Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing the content of a text message:
EIS
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key.
Message content is displayed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 Viewing Message Content
5) To close the text message, press the Cancel Softkey.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
INDEX
Or:
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Press the ENT Key.
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Deleting a message:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message is now deleted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
5) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message is now deleted.
476
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 SURFACEWATCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight guidance during airborne
or ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS information regarding the current active
runway, condition, or information about the position of hold lines.
NOTE: The SafeTaxi database must be available to provide information regarding taxiways, aprons and
other objects in the airport environment.
EIS
The SurfaceWatch™ feature provides visual annunciations to help the flight crew maintain situational
awareness and avoid potential runway incursions and excursions during ground and air operations in the airport
environment. The SurfaceWatch feature is comprised of the following key components:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alert Annunciations
- Taxiway Takeoff
- Runway Too Short (during takeoff or landing)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Check Runway (during takeoff or landing)
- Taxiway Landing
• Provides information on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) that contains runway and taxiway information that
changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The full SurfaceWatch feature is not available in Reversionary Mode.
Inhibiting/uninhibiting SurfaceWatch:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor..
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SurfaceWatch field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to toggle the SurfaceWatch alerts on or off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INFORMATION BOX
The SurfaceWatch™ Information Box is displayed on the PFD. It contains runway and taxiway information
that dynamically changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment. The information that is
displayed in the Information Box is the aircraft’s relative position to nearby aprons, taxiways, and runways.
APPENDICES
There are three components to the SurfaceWatch™ Information Box. These components are Currently
Occupied, Approaching, and Crossing Runways.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
477
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-46 Information Types Displayed in the Information Box
CURRENTLY OCCUPIED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘ON’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. The aircraft is
currently ‘ON’ runway 09 (RWY 09). The remaining runway distance is also shown when the aircraft is
situated on and aligned with a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft is airborne and approaching an airport, ‘AIRBORNE TO’ and the destination airport identifier
will be displayed.
Information regarding non-manuevering areas not labeled on the SafeTaxi diagram will not be displayed.
APPROACHING COMPONENT
AFCS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘APPROACHING’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. In the
previous figure, the aircraft is currently ‘APPROACHING’ taxiway C (TWY C). The distance to the taxiway
is also shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the aircraft is taxiing and crossing an intersection of multiple taxiways, ‘CROSSING’ will be displayed
and no distance will be shown.
APPENDICES
When the aircraft is taxiing and approaching an intersection of multiple taxiways, the taxiway identifiers
will be listed in order of proximity and the distance to the nearest is displayed.
This component lists the runways, from closest to furthest, that are ‘CROSSING’ the runway the aircraft
currently occupies. The distance to each runway is also shown in order of closest distance. Runways behind
the aircraft are not depicted.
CROSSING RUNWAYS
INDEX
The Crossing Runways component is shown in conjunction with the Currently Occupied component of
the Information Box.
478
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALERTS
The SurfaceWatch alert annunciations are displayed in the central portion of the PFD. The alert annunciations
are accompanied by a corresponding voice alert.
Associated Voice
Alert
TWY TAKEOFF
“Taxiway”
RWY TOO SHORT
“Runway too short”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a runway with a length less than needed as
calculated by the PERF function.
CHECK RUNWAY
“Check runway”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a runway different than that entered in PERF.
TWY LANDING
“Taxiway”
RWY TOO SHORT
“Runway too short”
CHECK RUNWAY
“Check runway”
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SurfaceWatch Alert
Annunciation
Description
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
EIS
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a runway with a length less than needed as calculated
by the PERF function.
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a runway different than that entered in PERF.
Table 8-3 SurfaceWatch Alert Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAKEOFF ALERTS
The Takeoff phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Takeoff Alerts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Taxiway Takeoff
The Taxiway Takeoff alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a non-runway (e.g. a
taxiway) or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
AFCS
In addition to the visual and voice alerts, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied taxiway (or other maneuvering area) and potentially the next area (apron or maneuvering area) to
be occupied (based on aircraft heading and the airport geometry) and the distance to that area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-47 Typical Taxiway Information Displayed in the Information Box
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Runway Too Short
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Runway Too Short (during takeoff) alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway
and the remaining runway length is less than the required length. The insufficient runway length condition
is determined based on aircraft current position during the takeoff roll and the required takeoff distance
information entered on the Takeoff Data Screen.
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway from which the aircraft is
taking off, the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in the Takeoff
Data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will contain a textual description of the
currently occupied runway and the remaining runway length.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-48 Typical Runway Information Displayed in the Information Box
Check Runway
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway that does not
match the departure runway entered in the Takeoff Data Screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied runway.
LANDING ALERTS
AFCS
The On-Final phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Landing Alerts.
Taxiway Landing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Taxiway Landing alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
APPENDICES
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING TWY” to indicate a non-runway landing is being attempted.
INDEX
Figure 8-49 Typical Information Displayed During a Taxiway Landing Alert
480
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Runway Too Short
The Runway Too Short alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway where the remaining
runway length is less than the required landing runway length entered in the Landing Data Screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway with which aircraft is aligned,
the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in entered in the Landing
Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING REMAINING” to indicate a the remaining runway length.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-50 Typical Information Displayed During a Runway Too Short Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Check Runway
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway that does not match the
arrival runway specified in the Landing Data.
Additionally, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier, the runway with which
the aircraft is aligned, and the distance to the runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-51 Typical Information Displayed During a Check Runway Alert
SURFACEWATCH SETUP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Origin/destination airport, runway and distance data entered integrates with SurfaceWatch technology to
alert the flight crew to a runway too short for takeoff/landing, or to advise of a potential taxiway takeoff/landing.
The runway selected in SurfaceWatch Setup appears on the airport diagram in cyan, and appears outlined in
cyan on the synthetic vision representation of the runway on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Entering origin/destination airport:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Origin or Destination Airport field.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
4) Use the FMS Knobs to input the desired Origin or Destination Airport.
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting origin/destination runway:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Runway or Landing Runway field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired available Runway or Landing Runway. As the small FMS Knob is
turned, the preview of the selected runway or landing runway is also displayed.
Selecting required takeoff/landing distance:
EIS
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the REQD Takeoff DIS or REQD Landing DIS field.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the required takeoff or landing distance. Upon pressing the FMS Knob and
committing the required takeoff or landing distance, the Runway Length field will turn amber if an insufficient
runway length exists.
INDEX
Figure 8-52 SurfaceWatch Setup Page (MFD)
482
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBERS AND REVISIONS
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
EIS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 8-4 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
AFCS
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database time critical information can also be found on the Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text.
Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the
listed information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information
is shown.
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
YYTI
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
EIS
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Database Cycle Number Format
YYII
Revision Cycle
28 days
YYMI
Not Applicable
YYTI
Not Applicable
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
INDEX
Table 8-5 Database Cycle Number and Revision
484
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 WIFI CONNECTIONS
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g WiFi data link between the aircraft and a
ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of the network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise
and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or other elements
that require user credentials, including a user name and password or a redemption or access code; or require
action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of WiFi functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux - Maintenance WiFi Setup’ Page.
EIS
Viewing the WiFi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Maintenance WiFi Setup’ Page.
Setting up a new WiFi connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Avail Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the Available Networks
window. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements and whether the network
has been saved in the system’s memory.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-53 Available WiFi Networks
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) If necessary, select the Rescan Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network.
EIS
5) Select the Connect Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the network is secured, a window will be displayed in order to enter the necessary passcode. Use the FMS
Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CapsLock Softkey to enter upper case letters.
If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) The Save Settings window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘Save Connection’.
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
Connecting the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘Connect’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Saving and connecting the selected network:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in
identifying the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘Connect’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
486
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Editing a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the Auto Connect checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
4) Select the Edit Softkey. The cursor now appears in the Connection Settings window.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘Save’ is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key.
Disconnecting a WiFi network:
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting a saved WiFi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
AFCS
3) Select the Delete Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 CONNEXT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the optional Flight Stream device, or an optional GTX 345R
transponder, for a Bluetooth connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™
application.
EIS
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The system is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Figure 8-54 Select the Connext Setup Page
Changing the Bluetooth Name
APPENDICES
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and the small FMS Knob
select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
488
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-55 Changing the Bluetooth Name
Enabling/disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-56 Flight Plan Import Enabled
Enabling/disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Aux - Connext Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-57 WiFi Database Disabled
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enabling/disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the system to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Figure 8-58 Disabled Auto Connect
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-59 Removing Paired Device
490
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 POSITION REPORTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the Position Reporting
feature.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
EIS
The position reports can be activated or deactivated by the pilot. While active, the position reports are
transmitted over the Iridium Short Burst Datalink periodically at a pilot specified interval or by touching the Send
REP Button. The minimum automatic transmission period between reports is two minutes with more frequent
transmissions possible via manually sending reports with the Send REP Button. During voice communications
and data transfers the Iridium datalink is occupied and position reports will not be sent. During this period the
reports will buffer and be sent as a package as soon as the link is available. The position reports are received by
Garmin Connext and forwarded to select flight tracking provider(s).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To reduce excess usage, position reports are only transmitted while the aircraft is in the air. The following are
position reports contents:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Tail Number
• Time
• Latitude/Longitude
• Ground Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground Track
• Heading
• Barometric Altitude
• True Airspeed
AFCS
• Outside Air Temperature
• Destination
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Airborne Status
The Airborne Status field is the indication that the aircraft is on the ground or in the air at the time the
position report was generated. The avionics generate a position report when the Airborne Status field changes
state.
APPENDICES
• Passengers Onboard
Passengers Onboard indicates passengers are on the aircraft at the time the position report was generated. A
position report is generated when the Passenger Onboard field changes state.
Viewing the Connext Page:
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Connext’ Page.
Setting up Position Reporting:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the ‘Aux - Connext’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor in the Transmission Period
field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ for automatic transmission of position or ‘Off’ to disable transmission
of position reports.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Transmission Rate field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the first digit.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the second digit.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
9) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Passengers On Board field.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) Turn the small FMS Knob left or right to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No.’
Figure 8-60 Setting Transmission Rate
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Sending a position report manually:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - Connext’ Page.
3) If necessary, set the Transmission Period to ‘Auto.’
INDEX
4) Press the Send REP Softkey.
492
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
APPENDICES
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Select the Lock Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather
Products
Window
Audio
Radio ID
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info
Softkey
Figure 8-61 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed XM Radio Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Select the Radio Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
494
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active
Channels
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Channel
List
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Categories
Field
Volume
Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-62 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
AFCS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
APPENDICES
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Select the Category Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
Figure 8-63 Categories List
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the Presets and More softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
APPENDICES
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, select the Presets
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
INDEX
2) Select the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the last five
channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Selecting the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Select any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) Softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
496
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Select Set to
Save Each
Preset Channel
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select Presets to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select More to
Cycle Through the
Preset Channels
EIS
Figure 8-64 Accessing and Selecting SiriusXM Preset Channels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUMEW
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the Volume Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.) Volume can also be adjusted
with the GMA 350c Volume Knob when MUS1 or MUS2 Buttons are pressed.
AFCS
Figure 8-65 Volume Control
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Muting SiriusXM audio:
Refer to the GMA 350c Audio Panel Controls in Section 4 for SiruisXM muting instructions.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• GPS vertical alert limit
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• EGT (1-6 deg F)
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• CHT (1-6 deg F)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• Engine Speed (rpm)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Power (%)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
APPENDICES
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
• GPS fix
• TIT (1-6 deg F)
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
INDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
498
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
log_180531_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-66 Log File Format
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.11 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the airframe. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the approved current pertinent flight manual or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements
document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Accessing and navigating checklists:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. Checklists are stored in internal memory once loaded into the
system. New checklist files, if made available by the manufacturer, may be installed by placing them on an SD
card and inserting the SD card into the top slot on the MFD bezel. After system startup, and the new checklists are
installed, the SD card may be removed from the top bezel slot (or left in place if data logging is desired).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
500
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.12 AUXILIARY VIDEO (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
There are four modes of operation of the auxiliary video display: Full-Screen, Full-Screen with Digital Zoom,
Split-Screen with Map, and Split-Screen with Map and Digital Zoom.
The system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system. The system can
display video for up to two inputs.
Displaying auxiliary video:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Video and display the ‘Aux - Video’ Page.
Control of the ‘Aux - Video’ Page can also be accessed through the Page Menu.
Figure 8-67 Aux - Video Page Menu
Selecting video menu options:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux - Video’ Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the ‘Aux - Video’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VIDEO SETUP
Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While viewing
the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the ‘Aux - Video’ Page
softkeys.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the video settings:
1) With the ‘Aux - Video’ Page displayed, press the Setup Softkey.
2) Press the Contrast - or Contrast +, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
3) Press the Bright - or Bright +, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
INDEX
4) Press the SAT - or SAT +, to adjust display saturation in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
5) If desired, return the display to the default settings by pressing the Reset Softkey.
6) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
502
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY SELECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the Hide Map Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the Hide Map Softkey again restores the map view and the
small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Video
Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-68 Aux - Video Split-Screen
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-69 Full Screen Video Display
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INPUT SELECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ZOOM/RANGE
While on the ‘Aux - Video’ Page, press the Input Softkey to select Input 1 or Input 2. The selected input is
displayed in the upper left of the video display.
EIS
The RANGE Knob can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in
and out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the Map Actv or Vid Actv softkey
determines which display the RANGE Knob adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP ACTV allows the
RANGE Knob to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display VID ACTV allows
the RANGE Knob to control the zoom setting of the video display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the Zoom + or Zoom - softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between 1x and
10x.
When zooming in on the video display, a Zoom Window will appear in the upper right of the display. A box
within this window indicates the portion of the display currently being viewed. The currently displayed portion
of the full display may be adjusted by using Joystick.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Zoom
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
View
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-70 Zoom Window
504
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.13 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP™)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) is an optional feature that is intended to discourage the exceedance of
attitude and established airspeed parameters. This feature will only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL
and the autopilot is not engaged.
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, Vmo, and/or Mmo) beyond the normal
flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control
surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control
movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
EIS
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the force increases (up to an established
maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or
airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant up
to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When ESP has been engaged for more than 20 seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
40-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing
the AP DISC switch, ESP force will again be applied, provided aircraft attitude and/or airspeed are within their
respective engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page on the MFD.
Enabling/disabling ESP:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
AFCS
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Stability & Protection field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
APPENDICES
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage (see
following figure). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move
to 30°, as shown in the following figure. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as
roll attitude decreases.
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-71 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
Figure 8-72 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in the following figure. The
force increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended
to encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
506
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10º
0º
10º
20º
5º
30
º
EIS
60
º
90º
90º
75º
75º
º
60
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
º
45
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
º
30
20º
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-73 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(following figure).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 49°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-74 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
APPENDICES
ESP engages at 16° nose-up and 17° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply opposing force between
11° and 50° nose-up and between 12° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in the following figure. Maximum
opposing force is applied between 25° and 50° nose-up and between 22° and 50° nose-down.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AFCS
50˚
45˚
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
50˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
35˚
40˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-75 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
LOW AIRSPEED PROTECTION
APPENDICES
Low speed protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. When the stall warning system determines a
stall condition is imminent, ESP will engage, applying force in the direction necessary to lower the nose of the
aircraft.
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
INDEX
Exceeding Vmo or Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high
airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
508
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.14 HYPOXIA RECOGNITION & AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Hypoxia Recognition detects pilot incapacitation due to the affects of hypoxia or other physical condition.
This is accomplished by monitoring pilot interaction with the system. If the system determines the pilot is not
responding, Automatic Descent Mode is activated placing the aircraft in a descent to a lower altitude to provide
the pilot and passengers an opportunity to recover from the effects of hypoxia.”
EIS
The system is operative when the aircraft altitude is above 14,900 feet (pressure altitude) and the Garmin AFCS
autopilot is engaged. Pilot interaction with the system is monitored by detecting key presses and turns of the
knobs (Audio Panel and push-to-talk switch excluded). If a period of inactivity (time dependent on altitude, see
following figure) is detected, Hypoxia Recognition initiates an automatic descent.
Upon activation, there are three sequential phases employed by the system; determining pilot alertness, descent
to 14,000 feet MSL, and descent to 12,500 feet MSL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DETERMINING PILOT ALERTNESS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the system detects a sufficient period of inactivity the Advisory Annunciation ‘Are you alert?’ is
displayed. Selecting the MSG Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system. Pressing any other
softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Caution Annunciation ‘HYPOXIA
ALERT’ is displayed. Again, selecting the MSG Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Warning Annunciation ‘AUTO
DESCENT’ is displayed in the Annunciation Window and ‘Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds’ is
displayed in the Messages Window. Once again, selecting the MSG Softkey will acknowledge the message and
reset the system. Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no interaction is detected for another 60 seconds, the system will automatically proceed with the
descent.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Period of Detected Inactivity (Minutes)
Time
e of Useful Conciousness (min)
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
15000
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft
Altitude
Aircraft
Altitude
(Feet) (ft)
Figure 8-76 Hypoxia Recognition Activation Times
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
NOTE: Automatic Descent Mode does not account for terrain elevation.
AFCS
As the system prepares for descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 14,000 and the AFCS enters IAS mode
with the airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed setting for the specific aircraft model. IAS
is displayed in the AFCS Status Box along with the target airspeed where Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)
is normally displayed. Refer to the Flight Director Vertical Modes in the AFCS section. AFCS lateral mode
settings are not affected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 14,000FT’ is displayed in the Messages Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an
AFCS Status Annunciation indicating the system has entered Automatic Descent Mode. ‘EDM’ (Emergency
Descent Mode) is the AFCS mode that is activated when Hypoxia Recognition initiates an automatic descent.
A continuous repeating chime will be heard as long as Automatic Descent Mode is active. After the descent
begins, Automatic Descent Mode can only be canceled by disconnecting the autopilot.
510
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
As the aircraft reaches 14,000 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation.
The system again begins monitoring for pilot interaction.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If no pilot interaction is detected for four minutes, the system initiates the second descent. As the system
prepares for this descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 12,500 and the AFCS again enters IAS mode with the
airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed for the specific aircraft model.
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 12,500FT’ is displayed in the Messages Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an
AFCS Status Annunciation. Also, the continuous repeating chime is heard.
EIS
As the aircraft reaches 12,500 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation
as well as the continuing presence of the repeating chime. At this point, the AFCS must be disconnected to
cancel Automatic Descent Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.15 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL 59/69/69A SXM TROUBLESHOOTING
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for GDL 59,
or GDL 69/69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Figure 8-77 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
APPENDICES
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
INDEX
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
512
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 69/69A SXM
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
NO SIGNAL
XM Information Page Weather
Datalink Page (MFD)
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Location
XM Information Page (MFD)
XM Information Page (MFD)
EIS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED Weather Datalink Page (MFD) No communication from Data Link Receiver within last 5 minutes
XM Information Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is activating
WAITING FOR DATA...
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading weather data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Table 8-6 GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
513
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
514
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The current version of the pertinent flight manual supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• CAS Window: The CAS Window displays abbreviated Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciation text. Text
color is based on alert levels described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the
Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the CAS
Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alerts Window: The 'Alerts' Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the Alerts Softkey displays the 'Alerts' Window. Pressing the Alerts Softkey a second time removes the 'Alerts'
Window from the display. When the 'Alerts' Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll through
the alert message list. The 'Alerts' Window displays CAS and System Messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Alerts Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to
accompany an alert. The Alerts Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning, Caution,
or Advisory). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The softkey
label then returns to Alerts. If alerts are still present, the Alerts label is displayed in white with black text.
Selecting the Alerts Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
'CAS'
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
'Alerts'
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
INDEX
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See
the CAS Message Prioritization Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
'Aux - System Status' Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the 'AUX - System Status' Page.
2) Select the ANN Test Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for corrective pilot actions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Warning or Caution Softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Alerting System uses four alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory,
message advisory alerts) and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the
message is based on its urgency and on required action. CAS Messages with descriptive text can be viewed in
the Alerts Window by pressing the Alerts (Warning, Caution, or Advisory) Softkey (refer to Figure A-2).
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
AFCS
• Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. Warning alert text is shown in red in the CAS
Window and a flashing Warning Softkey annunciation. A repeating double chime accompanies select warning
conditions. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the chime
(if present).
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. Caution alert text is shown in amber in the CAS Window and is accompanied by a flashing
‘Caution’ Softkey annunciation. A double chime lasting for one second occurs with select caution alerts.
Pressing the Caution Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert, stops the chime (if present) and
displays the alert text message in the 'Alerts' Window.
INDEX
• Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. Annunciation alert text is shown in white in the
CAS Window; no aural tone is generated with the exception of the 'OXYGEN LEFT ON' advisory message,
which produces a one second double chime. An annunciation alert is accompanied by a flashing Advisory
Softkey annunciation. Pressing the Advisory Softkey acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert
and displays the alert text message in the 'Alerts' Window. Some messages do not require acknowledgement.
• Message Advisory Alerts: This level of alert also provides general information but does not issue
annunciations in the CAS Window. Instead, message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ‘Message’ Softkey
516
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
annunciation. Selecting the Message Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and
displays the alert text message in the 'Alerts' Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might
display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time (unless the CAS
is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed
for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires
new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the
appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAS
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAS Messages
in 'Alerts' Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts
Softkey
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
CAS MESSAGES
APPENDICES
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Cirrus SR2x models. Red CAS Window text signifies
warnings and amber, cautions. See the current version of the pertinent flight manual for recommended pilot
actions.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
INDEX
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
WARNING MESSAGES
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the current version of the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
pertinent flight manual. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22T models.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
CAS Window Text
ANTI ICE CTRL
ANTI ICE QTY
ANTI ICE QTY
AOA OVERHEAT
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
BRAKE TEMP
CHT
CO LVL HIGH
ESS BUS
FLAP ICE
FUEL FLOW*
FUEL IMBALANCE
FUEL QTY
M BUS 1
M BUS 2
MAN PRESSURE*
OIL PRESS
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN FAULT
OXYGEN QTY
PITCH TRIM
RPM
SPIN SPIN SPIN
STALL
START ENGAGED
TIT*
UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE†
Alerts Window Text
Tank valves cannot be controlled (closed) (TKS).
Left and right fluid quantities are unknown (TKS).
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
AOA probe is overheated.
Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds.
Aircraft descending to 14,000FT.
Aircraft descending to 12,500FT.
Aircraft descended due to pilot incapacitation.
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Carbon monoxide level is too high.
Check essential power bus voltage.
Full flap prohibited in icing conditions.
Check fuel flow.
Fuel quantity imbalance has been detected.
Check fuel tank levels.
Check main power bus 1 voltage.
Check main power bus 2 voltage.
Check manifold pressure.
Oil pressure is out of range.
Oil temperature is high.
Oxygen system fault.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Pitch Trim control has failed.
Check engine RPM.
Spin entry detected.
Stall warning.
Starter is engaged.
TIT temperature is high.
None
INDEX
 Optional / * Not applicable to all models /  TKS FIKI (optional) / 1 In air only / ^ SR22T only / † Garmin AFCS required
518
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAUTION MESSAGES
Stall warning/AoA heater has failed.
Left tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS).
Right tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS).
Tail pressure is low (TKS).
Pressure is high (TKS).
Fluid quantity imbalance has been detected (TKS)
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed is too low for ice protection (TKS).
Airspeed is to high for ice protection (TKS).
Temperature is too low for ice protection (TKS).
Autopilot miscompare, autopilot is not available.
Autopilot and PFD are using different ADCs.
Autopilot and PFD are using different AHRSs.
Avionics master switch is off.
Check battery 1 current.
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Flaps are extended beyond airspeed limitations.
Fuel quantity imbalance has been detected.
Check fuel tank levels.
Hypoxia caution alert.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for geographic
locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may differ from the
actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
Check main power bus 1.
Check main power bus 2.
Check manifold pressure.
Autopilot air data modes are not available.
Autopilot vertical modes are not available.
Oil pressure is out of range.
Oil temperature is high.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Oxygen is required.
Parking break is set.
Pitot heat failure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
M BUS 1
M BUS 2
MAN PRESSURE*
NO ADC MODES
NO VERT MODES
OIL PRESSURE
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN QTY
OXYGEN RQD
PARK BRAKE
PITOT HEAT FAIL
Check alternator 1 current.
Check alternator 2 current.
Alternate air door is open.
EIS
LRG MAG VAR
Alerts Window Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS Window Text
ALT 1
ALT 2
ALT AIR OPEN*
ANTI ICE HEAT
ANTI ICE LEVEL
ANTI ICE LEVEL
ANTI ICE PRESS
ANTI ICE PRESS
ANTI ICE QTY
ANTI ICE QTY
ANTI ICE SPEED
ANTI ICE SPEED
ANTI ICE TEMP
AP MISCOMPARE
AP/PFD DIF ADC
AP/PFD DIF AHRS
AVIONICS OFF
BATT 1
BRAKE TEMP
CHT
FLAP OVERSPEED
FUEL IMBALANCE
FUEL QTY
HYPOXIA ALERT†
 Optional / * Not applicable to all models /  TKS FIKI (optional) / 1 In air only / † Garmin AFCS required
190-02183-02 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
CAS Window Text
PITOT HEAT REQD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SLCT MAG
SLCT NON-MAG
START ENGAGED
TAKEOFF FLAPS
Alerts Window Text
Pitot heat is required.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the 'Avionics Settings' Screen to
Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the 'Avionics Settings' Screen to
True.
Starter is engaged.
Flaps not in takeoff configuration.
 Optional / * Not applicable to all models /  TKS FIKI (optional) / 1 In air only / † Garmin AFCS required
EIS
ADVISORY MESSAGES
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the current version of the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
pertinent flight manual limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
CAS Window Text
ALTITUDE SEL
ALTITUDE SEL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ANTI ICE QTY
AOA FAIL
ARE YOU ALERT?†
COURSE SELECT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP CONFIG
EXIT ICING
FLAPS CLIMB
FUEL IMBALANCE
HDG MODE
AFCS
L FUEL QTY
OXYGEN LEFT ON
OXYGEN QTY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PUMP BACKUP
R FUEL QTY
ROL MODE
SFC WATCH FAIL
APPENDICES
VNAV ALT SEL
VNAV NOT ARMED
Alerts Window Text
Climbing away from selected altitude.
Descending away from selected altitude.
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
Dynamic stall speed band is unavailable.
Are you alert?
Current track will not intercept selected course.
ESP config error. Config service req'd.
Exit icing conditions.
Flaps not set for enroute climb.
Fuel quantity imbalance has been detected.
Heading mode active for extended period.
Check left fuel tank level.
Oxygen system is left on after shutdown.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Anti-ice backup pump mode has been selected (TKS).
Check right fuel tank level.
Roll mode is active.
Surfacewatch failed.
The current altitude selected will not capture the path for VNAV.
Press VNV to arm VPATH capture.
INDEX
 Optional / * Not applicable to all models /  TKS FIKI (optional)/ † Garmin AFCS required
520
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-02 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts Window Message
CO DET FAIL – The carbon monoxide detector is inoperative.
CO DET SRVC – The carbon monoxide detector needs service.
ESP FAIL† – ESP is inoperative.
ESP OFF† – ESP selected off.
ESP DEGRADE† – ESP IAS mode is inoperative.
EIS
FAILED PATH – An autopilot servo data path has failed.
MFD FAN FAIL – MFD cooling fan is inoperative.
PFD FAN FAIL – PFD cooling fan is inoperative.
 Optional/  TKS FIKI (optional)/ † Garmin AFCS required
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the current version of the
pertinent flight manual limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22T models.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOICE ALERTS
The following aural alerts are announced by the system using a voice of female gender. If an optional terrain
system is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the appropriate terrain alerts section in the Hazard
Avoidance Section).
Description
Airspeed exceeds VNE.
Issued when the aircraft transitions beyond the set altitude limit.
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
The ESP system is engaging the autopilot. See the Additional Features section for
“Engaging autopilot”
more details.
“Minimums, minimums”
Aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
“Incoming Call”
A call has been received via the Iridium system.
“Runway too short”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
"Six hundred"
The aircraft is 600 feet above terrain or runway.
"Spin, spin, spin"
Spin entry detected.
“Stall”
Imminent stall is sensed by stall vane.
“TAS System Test Passed”
Played when the optional GTS traffic system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
“TAS System Test Failed”
Played when the optional GTS traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway with a length
“Taxiway”
less than needed as entered.
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway different than
“Taxiway”
that entered in the Takeoff Data or Landing Data screen.
“Timer Expired”
Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero.
“TIS Not Available”
Aircraft is outside TIS coverage area.
“Traffic”
TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system.
TAS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional GTS TAS system. See the Hazard
“Traffic, (distance, bearing, altitude)”
Avoidance section for additional details on GTS voice alerts.
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is